2010 Element Owner's Manual

2010 Element

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web use. This is due to changes

in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a

hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.

© 2009 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-SCV-6700

OWNER _________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS _______________________________________________________STREET

_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

V. I. N. ___________________________________________________________

DELIVERY DATE __________________________________________________(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME ___________________ DEALER NO. ___________________ADDRESS _______________________________________________________

STREET

_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________CITY STATE/PROVINCE/TERRITORY ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

OWNER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________DEALER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________

This owner's manual should be considered apermanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner's manual covers all models of theElement. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the time ofapproval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, to discontinue orchange specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring anyobligation whatsoever.

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d'un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SCVC70

Owner's Identification

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2010 Honda Element was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer's staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you will findinformation that is preceded by a

symbol. This information isintended to help you avoid damage toyour vehicle, other property, or theenvironment.

Introduction

i

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure ofany airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. Itmay also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

ii

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:● Safety Labels－ on the vehicle.● Safety Messages－ preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: DANGER,WARNING, or CAUTION.

These signal words mean:

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don't followinstructions.

● Safety Headings－ such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

● Safety Section－ such as Driver and Passenger Safety.● Instructions － how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.This entire book is filled with important safety information － please read itcarefully.

A Few Words About Safety

iii

Your Element has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higherground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, andrough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a highcenter of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have asignificantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantlymore likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wearseat belts.For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 214 of this manual and theOff-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 238. Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss ofcontrol, a crash, or rollover.

Important Handling Information

iv

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................................... 3

Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection)........................................................................... 5

Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) .................................................... 55

Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, cruise control, and other convenience items) ...................... 103

Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)....................................................................................... 197

Driving (engine and transmission operation) ........................................................................................................... 213

Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage) ........................................................... 241

Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, jump starting, overheating, and fuses) ................................................... 281

Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ........................................................ 305

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ........................ 321

Index.............................................................................................................................................................................. I

INDEX

Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ............................................................... last page

Contents

1

ContentsA convenient reference to thesections in this manual.Your Vehicle at a GlanceA quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.Driver and Passenger SafetyImportant information about theproper use and care of your vehicle'sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.Instruments and ControlsExplains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator andgauge, and how to use the controlson the dashboard and steeringcolumn.FeaturesHow to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

Before DrivingWhat gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.DrivingThe proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you'replanning to tow a trailer.MaintenanceThe maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenanceservice. There is also a list of thingsto check and instructions on how tocheck them.Taking Care of the UnexpectedThis section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience, anddetails how to handle them.

Technical InformationID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.Warranty and Customer Relations(U.S. and Canada only)A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.IndexService Information SummaryA summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

Overview of Contents

2

ꭧ: If equipped

POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH(P. 80)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P. 92)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P. 200)

A/T model with navigation system is shown.AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 219)MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P. 217)

PARKING BRAKE(P. 94)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P. 104)

PASSENGER'SFRONT AIRBAG(P. 9, 25)

DRIVER'S FRONTAIRBAG (P. 9, 25)

INSTRUMENT PANEL (P. 57)GAUGES (P. 64)

MIRROR CONTROLS(P. 93)

USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ

(P. 164, 177)

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

Your

Vehicleat

aGlance

ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.ꭧ2: If equippedꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P. 71)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLSꭧ2

(P. 191)

A/T model with navigation system is shown.

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT(P. 74)

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS(P. 193)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS(P. 70)

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P. 32)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P. 109)DIGITAL CLOCK(P. 189)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON(P. 74)

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET(P. 100)

HORNꭧ1

VSA OFF SWITCH(P. 231)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P. 73)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROLBUTTONSꭧ3

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. It showsyou how to use seat belts. It explainshow your airbags work. And it tells youhow to properly restrain infants andchildren in your vehicle.

Important Safety Precautions............. 6Your Vehicle's Safety Features .......... 7

Seat Belts..................................... 8Airbags ........................................ 9

Protecting Adults and Teens ........... 111. Close and Lock the Doors........ 112. Adjust the Front Seats ............. 113. Adjust the Seat-Backs.............. 124. Adjust the Head Restraints ...... 135. Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts .................................. 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position.............................. 15Advice for Pregnant Women........ 16Additional Safety Precautions ...... 16

Additional Information About YourSeat Belts ............................... 18

Seat Belt System Components ..... 18

Lap/Shoulder Belt ...................... 19Automatic Seat Belt

Tensioners ............................. 20Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20

Additional Information About YourAirbags .................................. 22

Airbag System Components ........ 22How Your Front Airbags Work.... 25How Your Side Airbags Work...... 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

Work ..................................... 30How the SRS Indicator Works ..... 31How the Side Airbag Off

Indicator Works ..................... 32How the Passenger Airbag Off

Indicator Works ..................... 32Airbag Service............................ 33Additional Safety Precautions ...... 34

Protecting Children － GeneralGuidelines.............................. 35

All Children Must BeRestrained.............................. 35

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat ....................................... 36

The Passenger's Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks........... 36

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren ................................ 38

If a Child Requires CloseAttention................................ 38

Additional Safety Precautions ...... 39Protecting Infants and Small

Children................................. 40Protecting Infants ....................... 40Protecting Small Children ........... 41

Selecting a Child Seat ..................... 42Installing a Child Seat ..................... 43Installing a Child Seat with

LATCH .................................. 44Installing a Child Seat with a

Lap/Shoulder Belt .................. 46Installing a Child Seat with a

Tether ................................... 48Protecting Larger Children ............. 49Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 49Using a Booster Seat................... 50When Can a Larger Child Sit in

Front ..................................... 50Additional Safety Precautions ...... 51

Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............... 52Safety Labels .................................. 53

Driver and Passenger Safety

5

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

You'll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.Always Wear Your Seat BeltA seat belt is your best protection in alltypes of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts, notreplace them. So even though yourvehicle is equipped with airbags, makesure you and your passengers alwayswear your seat belts, and wear themproperly (see page 14).Restrain All ChildrenChildren age 12 and under should rideproperly restrained in a back seat, notthe front seat. Infants and smallchildren should be restrained in achild seat. Larger children should usea booster seat and a lap/shoulder beltuntil they can use the belt properlywithout a booster seat (see pages35 － 51).

Be Aware of Airbag HazardsWhile airbags can save lives, they cancause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them, orare not properly restrained. Infants,young children, and short adults are atthe greatest risk. Be sure to follow allinstructions and warnings in thismanual.Don't Drink and DriveAlcohol and driving don't mix. Even onedrink can reduce your ability to respondto changing conditions, and yourreaction time gets worse with everyadditional drink. So don't drink anddrive, and don't let your friends drinkand drive, either.Pay Appropriate Attention to theTask of Driving SafelyEngaging in mobile phone conversationor other activities that keep you frompaying close attention to the road, othervehicles and pedestrians could lead to acrash. Remember, situations canchange quickly, and only you candecide when it is safe to divert attentionaway from driving.

Control Your SpeedExcessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally, thehigher the speed, the greater the risk,but serious injuries can also occur atlower speeds. Never drive faster than issafe for current conditions, regardlessof the maximum speed posted.Keep Your Vehicle in Safe ConditionHaving a tire blowout or a mechanicalfailure can be extremely hazardous. Toreduce the possibility of such problems,check your tire pressures and conditionfrequently, and perform all regularlyscheduled maintenance (see page 243).

Important Safety Precautions

6

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together to protectyou and your passengers during acrash.Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the seatbelts in a crash.However, you and your passengerscan't take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting inthe correct position and always wearyour seat belts. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

(5)

(7)

(11) (8) (3) (4) (9)

(1)

(2)

(8)(10)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

(6)

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

7

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Seat BeltsYour vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.Why Wear Seat BeltsSeat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.In addition, most states, all Canadianprovinces and territories require youto wear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle hasairbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

When properly worn, seat belts:● Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle's built-in safety features.

● Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:– frontal impacts– side impacts– rear impacts– rollovers

● Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

● Keep you from being thrown out ofthe vehicle.

● Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.What You Should Do:Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.


8

Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page 25for more information on how yourfront airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page 28 for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact or rollover (seepage 30 for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

CONTINUED


9

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:● Airbags do not replace seat belts.They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

● Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

● Airbags can pose serious hazards.To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbagsdeploy.


10

IntroductionThe following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.See pages 35 － 51 for importantguidelines on how to properly protectinfants, small children, and largerchildren who ride in your vehicle.

1. Close and Lock the DoorsAfter everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors, the hatch,and the tailgate are closed andlocked.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate open indicator on

the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door, the tailgate orthe hatch is not tightly closed.Locking the doors, the hatch, and thetailgate reduces the chance ofsomeone being thrown out of thevehicle during a crash, and it helpsprevent passengers from accidentallyopening a door, the hatch, or thetailgate and falling out.Locking the doors, the hatch, or thetailgate also helps prevent anoutsider from unexpectedly openinga door when you come to a stop.See page 80 for how to lock thedoors, and page 61 for how the doorand tailgate indicator system works.

2. Adjust the Front Seats

Adjust the driver's seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

11

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down (seepage 74).If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.See page 83 for how to adjust thefront seats.

3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to acomfortable, upright position, leavingample space between your chest andthe airbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel.Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.


12

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant's chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.See page 83 for how to adjust theseat-backs.

4. Adjust the Head Restraints

Adjust the driver's head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Properly adjusted head restraints willhelp protect occupants from whiplashand other crash injuries.See page 85 for how to adjust thehead restraints.


13

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

5. Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt as lowas possible across your hips, thenpull up on the shoulder part of thebelt so the lap part fits snugly. Thislets your strong pelvic bones take theforce of a crash and reduces thechance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.


14

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back. This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt. Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.See page 18 for additionalinformation about your seat belts andhow to take care of them.

6. Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is safely parked and theengine is off.Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, liesdown, turns sideways, sits forward,leans forward or sideways, or putsone or both feet up, the chance ofinjury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.


15

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Advice for Pregnant Women

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.This will reduce the risk of injuries toboth you and your unborn child thatcan be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it's okay for you todrive.

Additional Safety Precautions● Never let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

● Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving. A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

● Two people should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.


16

● Do not put any accessories on seatbelts. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

● Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag. Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object in yourmouth, can result in injuries if yourfront airbag inflates.

● Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers. Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

● Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door. If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

● Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers. If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the front airbag inflates.

● Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer. Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.


17

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Seat Belt System ComponentsYour seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all four seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger'sseat (see page 27).

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger's seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver's seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:● Any items under the frontpassenger's seat.

● Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

● Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

18

Lap/Shoulder BeltThe lap/shoulder belt goes over yourshoulder, across your chest, andacross your hips.To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page 14 for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps some tensionon the belt. During a collision orsudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver's have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page 46).If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten the seatbelt, pull it out only as far as needed.


19

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver and afront passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy, or if a sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over (see page30).If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags do not deploy. In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theextra tension in the seat belt could behelpful.When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

Seat Belt MaintenanceFor safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page268). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your HondaWarranty Information booklet fordetails.


20

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.


21

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Airbag System Components

(12)

(1)(3)

(5)

(6)

(10)(4) (14)

(15)

(7)

(4)

(5)

(11)(10)

(13)(2)(9)(8)

(1) Driver's Front Airbag(2) Passenger's Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver's Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator(13) Rollover Sensor(14) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners(15) Rear Safing Sensor

Additional Information About Your Airbags

22

Your airbag system includes:● Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver'sairbag is stored in the center of thesteering wheel; the frontpassenger's airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page 25).

● Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page 28).

● Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 30).

(16)

(17)

(16) Side Curtain Airbags(17) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

CONTINUED


23

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

● Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page 20).

● Sensors that can detect a moderateto severe front impact, side impact,or rollover.

● Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger's sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage 29).

● Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver's seat belt and the frontpassenger's seat belt are latched orunlatched (see page 18).

● A driver's seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page27).

● Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger'sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger's front airbag will beturned off (see page 27).

● A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

● An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page 31).

● An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger's side airbag has beenturned off (see page 32).

● An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger'sfront airbag has been turned off(see page 32).

● Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle's electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.


24

How Your Front Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate to severefrontal collision, sensors will detectthe vehicle's rapid deceleration.If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will inflatethe driver's and front passenger'sairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.Only the driver's airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger'sairbag off (see page 27).

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won'tinterfere with the driver's visibility,or the ability to steer or operate othercontrols.

CONTINUED


25

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag's surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Dual-Stage AirbagsYour front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.In a more severe crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.In a less severe crash, the first stagewill ignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

Dual-Threshold AirbagsYour front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.If the occupant's belt is not latched,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.If the occupant's belt is latched, theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.


26

Advanced AirbagsYour front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren or small statured adults whoride in front.For both advanced airbags to workproperly:● Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

● Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver's advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag will inflatewith less force, regardless of theseverity of the impact.If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver'sseating position.

The passenger's advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Honda doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger's front airbag off.Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger's seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

DRIVER'S SEATPOSITION SENSOR

PASSENGER'S SEATWEIGHT SENSOR

CONTINUED


27

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

When the passenger airbag getsturned off by the weight sensors, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page 32).If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag is automatically turned off.However, the passenger airbag off inthis situation indicator will not comeon.To ensure that the passenger'sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly, do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger's seat.This includes:● A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger's seat.

● Moving the front seat forcibly backagainst cargo on the seat or floorbehind it.

● Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

● Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

● Back seat passengers should notwedge objects or intentionallyforce their feet under frontpassenger seat.

If your vehicle has optional floormats, make sure the mat behind thefront passenger's seat is hoocked tothe floor mat anchor (see page 268).If it is not, the mat may interfere withthe proper operation of the sensorsand operation of the seat.

How Your Side Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate to severeside impact, sensors will detect rapidacceleration and signal the controlunit to instantly inflate either thedriver's or the passenger's sideairbag.


28

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger's side, the passenger'sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Side Airbag Cutoff SystemYour vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger'sseat.Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag'sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag'sdeployment path.Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page 32), have the passengersit upright. Once the passenger isout of the airbag's deployment path,the system will turn the airbag backon, and the indicator will go out.There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or another object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.


29

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

In a Side ImpactIn a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver's or thepassenger's side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger'sside, the passenger's side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.In a RolloverIf the rollover sensor detects yourvehicle is about to roll over, it signalsthe control unit, which immediatelydeploys both side curtain airbags andactivates both front seat belttensioners.The airbag on the passenger's sidewill deploy, and the seat belttensioner will activate, even if thereare no passengers on that side of thevehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG


30

How the SRS Indicator WorksThe SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

If the indicator comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:● If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

● If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

● If the indicator comes on or flasheson and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not workproperly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.


31

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

How the Side Airbag Off IndicatorWorks

U.S. Canada

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger's side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It does notmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page 59). If it doesn't comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger's front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger's seat.It does not mean there is a problemwith the airbag.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly if thetotal weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as far tothe rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada


32

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:● Any items under the frontpassenger's seat.

● Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

● Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Airbag ServiceYour airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:● An airbag ever inflates. Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

● The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem. Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

● If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact. Even if your airbagsdo not inflate, your dealer shouldinspect the driver's seat positionsensor, the front passenger'sweight sensors, the front seat belttensioners, and all seat belts andtheir anchors worn during a crashto make sure they are operatingproperly.


33

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Additional Safety Precautions● Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags. Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

● Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason. Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

● Do not expose the frontpassenger's seat-back to liquid. Ifwater or another liquid soaks intothe seat-back, it can prevent theside airbag cutoff system fromworking properly.

● Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer. This could make thedriver's seat position sensor or thefront passenger's weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.


34

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

All Children Must Be RestrainedEach year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, trafficaccidents are the number one causeof death of children age 12 andunder.To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state,Canadian province and territoryrequires that infants and children beproperly restrained when they ride ina vehicle.Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to the vehicle(see pages 40－ 48).

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride on abooster seat until the seat belt fitsthem properly (see pages 49－ 51).

Protecting Children － General Guidelines

35

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeatAccording to statistics, children of allages and sizes are safer when theyare restrained in a back seat.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

The Passenger's Front Airbag CanPose Serious RisksFront airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger's front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger'sfront airbag off under certaincircumstances (see page 32), pleasefollow these guidelines:InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag. If theairbag inflates, it can hit the back ofthe child seat with enough force tokill or very seriously injure an infant.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag can behazardous. If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger'sfront airbag. Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page 49 for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).


36

To remind you of the passenger'sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

DASHBOARD

Canadian Models

SUN VISORS

SUN VISORS


37

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildrenYour vehicle has two back seatswhere children can be properlyrestrained. If you ever have to carry agroup of children, and a child mustride in front:● Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page 49).

● Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page 83).

● Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page 15).

● Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page14).

If a Child Requires CloseAttentionMany parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.


38

Additional Safety Precautions● Never hold an infant or child onyour lap. If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing a seatbelt, the child can be torn fromyour arms and be seriously hurt orkilled.

● Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child. During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

● Never let two children use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

● Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked. If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See page 46 for how to activateand deactivate the lockableretractor.)

● Do not leave children alone in avehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates, Canadian provinces/territories, and can be veryhazardous.For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

● Lock all doors, the tailgate and thehatch when your vehicle is not inuse. Children who play in vehiclescan accidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

● Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren. Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the tailgate or hatch,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.


39

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Protecting Infants

Child Seat TypeAn infant must be properly restrainedin a rear-facing, reclining child seatuntil the child reaches the seatmaker's weight or height limit for theseat, and the child is at least one yearold.Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby's head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position. If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Rear-facing Child Seat PlacementA rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front. Never put arear-facing child seat in the front seat.

If the passenger's front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger'sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

40

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger's seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acrash.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat TypeMany states, Canadian provinces andterritories allow a child one year of ageor older who also meets the minimumsize and weight requirements totransition from a rear-facing child seatto a forward facing seat. Know therequirements where you are drivingand follow the child seat instructions.Many experts recommend use of arear-facing seat up to age two, if thechild's height and weight areappropriate for a rear-facing seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-pointharness system as shown.

We also recommend that a small childuse the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limit forthe seat.Child Seat PlacementWe strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a back seat,not the front.

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's airbag can behazardous. If the vehicle seat is too farforward, or the child's head is thrownforward during a collision, an inflatingairbag can strike the child with enoughforce to cause very serious or fatalinjuries.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children

41

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Even with advanced front airbags thatautomatically turn the passenger's frontairbag off (see page 32), a back seat isthe safest place for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facingchild seat in the front, move the vehicleseat as far to the rear as possible, andbe sure the child seat is firmly securedto the vehicle and the child is properlystrapped in the seat.

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can result inserious injury or death if the frontairbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facingchild seat in front, move thevehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Selecting a Child SeatWhen buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH) system.Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the rear seats.Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:1. The child seat should meet Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213. Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

2. The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

42

3. The child seat should fit the vehicleseating position (or positions)where it will be used.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Installing a Child SeatAfter selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:1. Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle. All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

2. Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured. After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat'seffectiveness.If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.3. Secure the child in the child seat.Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker'sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

43

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) at the rear seats.The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:1. Remove both anchor covers bypulling forward.

2. Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

3. Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker's instructions.Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

MARKS

LOWER ANCHORS

ANCHOR COVER Rigid-type

Installing a Child Seat

44

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.4. Whatever type you have, follow thechild seat maker's instructions foradjusting or tightening the fit.

5. Remove the head restraint (seepage 85). Make sure the removedhead restraints are secured in thecargo area, and reinstalled whenthe child seat is removed.

6. Route the tether strap over the topof the seat-back, making sure thestrap is not twisted.

7. Slide the anchor cover open.

Flexible-type ANCHOR COVER

TETHER ANCHOR

CONTINUED


45

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

8. Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

9. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder BeltWhen not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver's have a lockable retractor thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

1. With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat according tothe seat maker's instructions, theninsert the latch plate into thebuckle and remove any slack fromthe lap portion of the belt.

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHOR


46

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help to putweight on the child seat, or pushon the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.


47

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in either back seat, usingone of the anchor points shownabove.Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

1. After securing the child seat in thedesired position (see page 46),remove the head restraint (seepage 85), then route the tetherstrap over the top of the seat-back.

2. Slide the anchor cover open asshown.

3. Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

4. Tighten the strap according to theseat maker's instructions. Makesure the removed head restraint issecured in the cargo area. Reinstallthe head restraint in place whenyou remove the child seat.

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

TETHER ANCHOR

ANCHOR COVER TETHER ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK


48

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear the lap/shoulder belt.The following pages give instructionson how to check proper seat belt fit,what kind of booster seat to use if oneis needed, and important precautionsfor a child who must sit in front.

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger's frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, use a booster seat ifneeded, have the child sit upproperly and wear the seat beltproperly.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:1. Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

2. Do the child's knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

3. Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child's neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child'sthighs?

5. Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Protecting Larger Children

49

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Using a Booster Seat

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seat untilthe lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.Some states, Canadian provinces andterritories also require children touse a booster seat until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the states, provinces orterritories where you intend to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards and that you followthe booster seat maker'sinstructions.If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seat beltproperly.A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle's orbooster's seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFrontThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.If the passenger's front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child's body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.


50

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.MaturityTo safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.Physical SizePhysically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages 14 and 49). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:● Carefully read the owner's manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

● Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

● Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

● Check that the child's seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

● Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Additional Safety Precautions● Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck. This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

● Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm. This could causevery serious injuries during acrash. It also increases the chancethat the child will slide under thebelt in a crash and be injured.

● Two children should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

● Do not put any accessories on aseat belt. Devices intended toimprove a child's comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.


51

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

Your vehicle's exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:● The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

● You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

● The vehicle was in a collision thatmay have damaged the underside.

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate or hatch open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into yourvehicle's interior and create ahazardous condition. If you mustdrive with the tailgate or hatch open,open all the windows and set theheating and cooling system as shownbelow.If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:1. Select the fresh air mode.2. Select the mode.3. Turn the fan on high speed.4. Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

52

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death.Read these labels carefully.If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner),contact your dealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

Canadian models

U.S. models

SUN VISORDASHBOARDU.S. models only

CONTINUED

Safety Labels

53

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

U.S. models Canadian modelsRADIATOR CAP

DOORJAMBS

Safety Labels

54

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

Control Locations.......................... 56Instrument Panel .......................... 57Instrument Panel Indicators.......... 58Gauges.......................................... 64

Information Display .................. 65Odometer.................................. 65Trip Meter ................................ 66Fuel Gauge ............................... 66Check Fuel Cap Message ......... 66Temperature Gauge.................. 67Maintenance Minder ................ 67Outside Temperature

Indicator ............................... 68

Controls Near the SteeringWheel ....................................... 69

Windshield Wipers andWashers.................................... 70

Turn Signals and Headlights......... 71Instrument Panel Brightness ........ 72Hazard Warning Button ................ 73Rear Window Defogger................. 74Steering Wheel Adjustment .......... 74Keys and Locks............................. 75Immobilizer System ...................... 76Remote Transmitter ...................... 77Ignition Switch.............................. 79Door Locks ................................... 80Power Door Locks .................... 80Rear Doors................................ 81Hatch ........................................ 81Tailgate ..................................... 82

Seats ............................................. 83Seat Adjustments ...................... 83Driver's Seat Height

Adjustment ........................... 84Front Seat Armrests.................. 85Head Restraints......................... 85

Reclining the Front Seats .......... 87Folding the Rear Seats .............. 88Removing the Rear Seats .......... 90

Power Windows ............................ 92Mirrors ......................................... 93Adjusting the Power Mirrors..... 93

Rear Windows............................... 94Parking Brake............................... 94Interior Lights............................... 95Light Control Switch ................. 95Individual Map Lights ............... 95Courtesy Light .......................... 96Ceiling Light ............................. 96Cargo Area Light....................... 96Ignition Switch Light................. 96

Interior Convenience Items........... 97Cooler Box................................ 98Beverage Holders ..................... 99Accessory Power Sockets ....... 100Glove Box ............................... 100Sun Visor ................................ 100Vanity Mirror .......................... 101Overhead Console .................. 101

Instruments and Controls

55

Instruments

andControls

ꭧ: If equipped

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH (P. 231)

PARKING BRAKE(P. 94)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P. 109)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P. 104)


POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH(P. 80)

MIRROR CONTROLS(P. 93)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P. 92)

INSTRUMENT PANEL (P. 57)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P. 200)

GAUGES (P. 64)

USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ

(P. 164, 177)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 219)MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P. 217)

Control Locations

56

ꭧ: The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

DRL

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTSINDICATOR (P. 60)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR(P. 61)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 58, 295)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA)INDICATOR(P. 62)

VSA OFFINDICATOR(P. 62)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR (P. 59)

LOW OILPRESSUREINDICATOR(P. 58, 295)

DOOR AND TAILGATEOPEN INDICATOR (P. 61)

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR (P. 59)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 60)

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 59)

LOW FUELINDICATOR(P. 61)

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR (P. 59)

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR (P. 58)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 61)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR(P. 58, 297)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR (P. 60)

TPMS INDICATOR(P. 63)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR(P. 60)

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP (P. 58, 296)

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR (P. 62)

Instrument Panel

57

Instruments

andControls

The instrument panel has manyindicators that give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

For more information, see page 296.

Low Oil PressureIndicator

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page 295.

Charging SystemIndicator

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For moreinformation, see page 295.

U.S. Canada Parking Brakeand BrakeSystem Indicator(Red)

This indicator has two functions:1. It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

2. If it remains on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage 297.

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper soundsand the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

Instrument Panel Indicators

58

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page 18.

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates a potentialproblem with your front airbags. Thisindicator will also alert you to apotential problem with your sideairbags, passenger's side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver's seat position sensor, or thefront passenger's weight sensors.For more information, see page 31.

U.S. Canada

Side Airbag OffIndicator

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger's side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page 32.

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

This indicator normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, andwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe START (III) position. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemwith the ABS. If this happens, haveyour vehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lockfunction. For more information, seepage 226.

Maintenance MinderIndicator

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page243 for more information on themaintenance minder.This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

CONTINUED


59

Instruments

andControls

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willthen go off if you have inserted aproperly coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly coded key, theindicator will blink, and the enginewill not start (see page 76).This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blinkor they blink rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page 263). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

Daytime Running LightsIndicator

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemwith a circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

Cruise Control Indicator

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page 193for information on operating thecruise control.

Cruise Main Indicator

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel (see page 193).


60

Lights On Indicator

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver's door.

High Beam Indicator

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page 71.

Washer Level Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page 255).Low Fuel Indicator

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereis about 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 L) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.Door and Tailgate Open Indicator

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the hatch, thetailgate, or any door is not closedtightly.

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

CONTINUED


61

Instruments

andControls

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and when the ignition switchis turned to the START (III) position.It flashes when VSA is active (seepage 230).If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page 230for more information on the VSAsystem.

VSA OFF Indicator

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehicle stabilityassist (VSA) system.This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and when the ignition switchis turned to the START (III) position.See page 230 for more informationon the VSA system.

Low Tire PressureIndicator

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle's tires are significantly low onpressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page 282), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page 303). For moreinformation, see page 227.


62

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS; thesystem that monitors tire pressure.With this indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.


63

Instruments

andControls

ꭧ: If equipped.

DRL

TACHOMETER

SPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

U.S. model is shown.

INFORMATION DISPLAY

ODOMETER/TRIP METER/CHECK FUEL CAP MESSAGE

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

SELECT/RESETKNOB

OUTSIDE TEMPERATUREINDICATORꭧ

Gauges

64

Information DisplayThe information display shows theodometer, trip meter, engine oil life,outside temperature (if equipped),and maintenance item code(s).

To switch the display, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, your last selection isdisplayed.

OdometerThe odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialand territorial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.OUTSIDE

TEMPERATUREINDICATOR

ODOMETER TRIP METER A

ENGINE OILLIFE TRIP METER B

U.S. model with outside temperature indicator is shown.

Gauges

65

Instruments

andControls

Trip MeterThis shows the number of miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) drivensince you last reset it.There are two trip meters: Trip A andTrip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the select/resetknob repeatedly.Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the lastselection is displayed.To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

Fuel GaugeThis shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Check Fuel Cap MessageYour vehicle's onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the select/reset knob.The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messagewill appear each time you restart theengine until the system turns themessage off.

Gauges

66

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle's evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage 296.

Temperature GaugeThis shows the temperature of theengine's coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Turn topage 293 for instructions andprecautions on checking the engine'scooling system.

Maintenance MinderThe information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page 243 formore information.

Gauges

67

Instruments

andControls

Outside Temperature IndicatorOn EX and SC modelsThis indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Celsius (Canadianmodels).The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your vehicle speed is under 19mph (30 km/h). When you start yourtrip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up toꭗ5°F in U.S. models (ꭗ3°Cin Canadian models) warmer orcooler.NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

To adjust the outside temperatureindicator, make sure the odometer isshown in the display, then press andhold the select/reset knob for 10seconds. The following sequence willappear for 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4,5,－5,－4,－3,－2,－1, 0 (U.S.) or0, 1, 2, 3,－3,－2,－1, 0 (Canada).When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the select/reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

Gauges

68

ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.ꭧ2: If equippedꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON(P. 73)

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS (P. 193)

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT (P. 74)

HORNꭧ1


VSA OFF SWITCH(P. 231)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROLBUTTONSꭧ3

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLSꭧ2

(P. 191)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P. 71)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS(P. 70)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON(P. 74)

MANUALTRANSMISSION(P. 217)AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(P. 219)

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET(P. 100)

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

69

Instruments

andControls

Windshield Wiper

1. MIST2. OFF3. INT － Intermittent3. LO － Low speed5. HI － High speed6. Windshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.MIST － The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.OFF－ The wipers are not activated.INT－ The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle's speed.Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay ( position), thewipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).LO － The wipers run at low speed.HI－ The wipers run at high speed.Windshield Washer－ Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

1. Rotate the switch clockwise to turnthe rear window wiper ON.

2. Hold past ON to turn the windowwiper on and the window washeron.

3. OFF4. Rotate the switchcounterclockwise and hold tospray the window washer andoperate the wiper.

ADJUSTMENT RING

Windshield Wipers and Washers

70

1. Turn signal2. Off3. Parking and instrument panellights4. Headlights on5. High beams6. Flash high beams

Turn Signal－ Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Headlights－ Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the lightson indicator comes on as a reminder.This indicator stays on if you leavethe light switch on and turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position.If you leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver's door.

CONTINUED

Turn Signals and Headlights

71

Instruments

andControls

High Beams－ Push the lever backuntil you hear a click to turn on thehigh beams. The blue high beamindicator will come on (see page 61).Pull the lever back again to lowbeams.To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Daytime Running LightsWith the headlight switch off, thedaytime running lights come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and release theparking brake. They remain on untilyou turn the ignition switch off, evenif you set the parking brake.When the headlights are on, thedaytime running lights are off.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The select/reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

Turn Signals and Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

72

The level of brightness is shown onthe information display while youadjust it. It goes out about 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Turning the select/resetknob to the right until you hear abeep will cancel the reducedbrightness.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youunlock and open the driver's door.The brightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normalbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver's door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

Hazard Warning Button

Push the button next to the shiftlever to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

BRIGHTNESS LEVEL


Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

73

Instruments

andControls

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator in thebutton comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentMake any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment

74

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:1. Push the lever under the left sideof the steering column all the waydown.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown to the desired position.Make sure you can see theinstrument panel gauges and theindicators.

3. Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

4. Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Keys and Locks

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the doorlocks. You can keep the glove boxand hatch locked when you leaveyour vehicle and the valet key at aparking facility.

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEYS(BLACK)

VALETKEY(LIGHTGRAY)

CONTINUED

Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks

75

Instruments

andControls

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if the circuitsare damaged.● Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

● Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

● Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.See page 77 for an explanation of theremote transmitter's operation.

Immobilizer SystemThe immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine's fuelsystem is disabled.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.The system may not recognize yourkey's coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keychain) is near the ignition switchwhen you insert the key.

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

76

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.Do not attempt to alter this system oradd other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.If you have lost your key and cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote Transmitter

LOCK－ Press this button once tolock both doors and hatch. Someexterior lights will flash. When youpush LOCK twice within 5 seconds,you will hear a horn to verify that thedoors are locked. You cannot lock itif any door is not fully closed or keyis in the ignition switch.

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

CONTINUED

Immobilizer System, Remote Transmitter

77

Instruments

andControls

UNLOCK－ Press this button onceto unlock the driver's door. Push ittwice to unlock the passenger's doorand the hatch. Some exterior lightswill flash twice each time you pressthe button. If you do not open eitherdoor or the hatch within 30 seconds,they will automatically relock.PANIC－ Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Remote Transmitter Care● Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

● Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

● Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

● If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the hatch, replace the battery assoon as possible.Battery type: CR2025

ROUNDCOVER

BATTERY

Remote Transmitter

78

To replace the battery, remove theround cover on the back of thetransmitter by turning itcounterclockwise with a coin. Inserta new battery with the＋ side facingup, and reinstall the cushion ring.Align the mark on the cover withthe mark on the transmitter. Setthe cover in place and turn itclockwise.




Ignition Switch

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).LOCK (0) － You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in Park.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter, Ignition Switch

79

Instruments

andControls

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficult toturn the key. Firmly turn the steeringwheel to the left or right as you turnthe key.ACCESSORY (I)－ You can operatethe audio system and the accessorypower sockets in this position.ON (II)－ This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.START (III) － Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver's door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Power Door Locks

To lock all of the doors and hatch,press the door lock switch on thedriver's door, or press the lock tabdown on the driver's door, or use thekey on the outside lock. Pressing upon the door lock switch will unlockall of the doors and the hatch.

LOCK TAB

DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

80

The lock tab on the passenger's doorlocks and unlocks only that door.Pulling up on the driver's door locktab only unlocks the driver's door.To lock the driver's door, remove thekey from the ignition switch, pushthe lock tab down or push the doorlock switch down, then close thedoor.To unlock the driver's door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.Lockout PreventionWith the driver's door open and thekey in the ignition switch, the masterdoor lock switch is disabled. It is notdisabled if the driver's door is closed.If you try to lock the open driver'sdoor with the key in the ignitionswitch by pushing in the lock tab, thetabs on all doors pop up when youclose the door.

Rear Doors

To open the rear door, pull the reardoor handle located in the rear dooredge. The rear door can be openedonly when the front door is open.To close the doors, close the reardoor first, then the front door. Thefront door cannot be latched withoutfirst closing the rear door. Closingthe rear door on the front door willdamage both doors.

Hatch

To lock or unlock the hatch.● Use your master key to lock andunlock the hatch. Turn the keycounterclockwise to lock thehatch, and clockwise to unlock it.

Unlock

Lock

CONTINUED

Door Locks

81

Instruments

andControls

● Lock the hatch by pushing downthe lock tab on the driver's door(see page 80), or by using themaster key in the driver's doorlock.

● Lock or unlock the hatch with themaster door lock switch.

With the hatch unlocked, open it bypulling the handle and lifting up.To close the hatch, lower it, thenpress down on the back edge.When both the hatch and tailgate areopen, the hatch cannot be latchedwithout first closing the tailgate.

Tailgate

You can open the tailgate only whenthe hatch is open. To open thetailgate, slide the lock lever to the leftand swing down the tailgate. To closethe tailgate, lift it up and push itfirmly until it latches.Before closing the tailgate, makesure the hatch is raised. Closing thetailgate on the lowered hatch candamage the hatch and the tailgate.

Door Locks

82

See page 210 for information oncargo loading. Keep the tailgate andthe hatch closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging them, andto prevent exhaust gas from gettinginto the interior. See CarbonMonoxide Hazard on page 52.

Seat AdjustmentsSee pages 11 － 13 for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

Make all seat adjustments before youstart driving.

Front Seat

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion's front edge. Try tomove the seat to make sure it islocked in position.

CONTINUED

Door Locks, Seats

83

Instruments

andControls

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom. Adjust theseat-back and make sure it locks intoposition.

Rear Seat

To change the angle of the rear seat-back, pull the strap at the inside edgeof the seat cushion, make sure theseat-back locks into position.

Driver's Seat Height Adjustment

To adjust the height of the driver'sseat, turn the dial on the outside ofthe seat bottom.

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP

Seats

84

Front Seat ArmrestsOn EX model

Each front seat has an armrest on theside of the seat-back. To use it, pivotit down.

Head RestraintsSee page 13 for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant's head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

CONTINUED

Seats

85

Instruments

andControls

Adjusting the Head Restraint

The head restraints in the front andrear seating positions adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. To raise it, pullupward. To lower the restraint, pushthe release button sideways andpush the restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.Make sure the head restraint locks inposition when you reinstall it.

RELEASE BUTTON

Front Rear CUSHION

RELEASEBUTTON

SEAT-BACKLEGS

Seats

86

Reclining the Front Seats

You can recline the seat-backs on thefront seats so they are level with therear seat cushions, making a largecushioned area. To do this:

1. Remove the head restraints fromthe front seats (see page 85), andstore them in the side pockets ofthe cargo area.

2. Adjust the front seats forward asfar as possible. Pull up the seat-back angle adjustment lever andpivot the seat-back backward untilit is level with the rear seatcushion.

3. Move the front seat backward untilit touches the rear seat.

4. Adjust the rear seat-back to thedesired position.

Reverse this procedure to return thefront and rear seats to the uprightposition. Make sure you install thehead restraints and the seats arelocked securely before driving.When you return the seat-back to itsupright position, hold the seat-backto keep it from going up too quickly.

Seats

87

Instruments

andControls

Folding the Rear SeatsTo create more cargo space, you canfold up each rear seat to each sidewall separately.1. Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

2. Pull the seat-back adjustment strapat the inside edge of the seatcushion and push the seat-backbackward as far as it will go.

3. Pull the release strap on the seatsupport, and pivot the seat towardthe vehicle's side wall.

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT STRAP RELEASE STRAP

Seats

88

4. A fastening strap is attached to theinside of the seat cushion. Whilepushing the seat up and toward theside wall, hook the fastening strapto the grab rail.

5. Fold down the seat support.

Reverse this procedure to return therear seat to the upright position.When not in use, store the fasteningstrap hook in the fabric pocket on thebottom of the seat cushion. Makesure the seat is locked securely.

GRAB RAIL

FASTENING STRAP

SEAT SUPPORT

Seats

89

Instruments

andControls

Removing the Rear Seats

Both seats can be removed to givemore cargo capacity. To remove aseat:1. Pull the release strap on the seatsupport to unlock the seat support.

2. Remove the cover between theseat cushion and the side wall bypulling the tab and pulling thecover straight up.

3. Push the lock lever forward tounlock the seat and fold down theseat support.

RELEASE STRAP

TAB

COVER

LOCK LEVER STEEL HANDLE

Seats

90

4. Hold the steel handle next to thelock lever and the handle strap atthe outside edge of the seatcushion, and remove the entireseat by pulling it up and backward.

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe seat. Make sure the seats aresecurely locked in place beforedriving.Always remove an unsecured seatfrom the vehicle before driving. Aseat that is not locked in place couldbe thrown about and cause injury in asudden stop or crash.

STEEL HANDLE

HANDLE STRAP

Seats

91

Instruments

andControls

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower eitherwindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

Closing a power window onsomeone's hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the window beforeclosing them.

AUTO － To open/close the driver'swindow, push the window switchfirmly down or up to the seconddetent, and release it. The windowwill automatically go up or down allthe way. To stop the window, pull/push on the window switch briefly.If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger's window cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thepassenger's window unintentionally.

AUTO REVERSE － If the driver'swindow senses any obstacle while it isclosing automatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, then usethe window switch again.If your vehicle's battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the driver's windowfuse is removed, the AUTO functionmay be disabled. If this happens, thepower window system will need to bereset after reconnecting the battery orinstalling the fuse.1. Start the engine. Push down and

hold the driver's window switch untilthe window is fully open.

2. Pull and hold the driver's windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switch forabout 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

DRIVER'S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Power Windows

92

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

2. Move the selector switch to L(driver's side) or R (passenger'sside).

3. Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

4. When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns the adjustmentswitch off to keep your settings.

TABSELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Mirrors

93

Instruments

andControls

Rear Windows

To open a rear window, pull the levertowards you, then push it out until itlocks. To close the rear window pullthe lever towards you, then push itback. Make sure the window is fullyclosed and locked.

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull the leverup fully. To release it, pull up slightly,push the button, and lower the lever. Theparking brake indicator on the instrumentpanel should go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page 58).

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Rear Windows, Parking Brake

94

Light Control SwitchOn EX and SC models

The light control switch has threepositions: OFF, Door Activated, andON.

When the switch is in the OFF position:● The individual map lights can beturned on and off by pressing thelenses.

● The ceiling light cannot be turnedon.

When the switch is in the door activatedposition:● The individual map lights come onwhen any door is opened, or whenthe remote transmitter is used tounlock the doors (see page 77).When the doors are closed, eachlight can be turned on and off bypushing the lens.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelights dim slightly, then fade out inabout 30 seconds.

With any door left open, the lights stayon about 3 minutes, then go out.

The lights also come on when the keyis removed from the ignition switch.

When the light control switch is in theON position:● All the individual map lights andceiling light come on and stay on aslong as the switch remains in the ONposition.

Individual Map LightsOn EX and SC models

Turn on the individual map lights bypushing the lens. Push the lens againto turn it off.

OFF ON

DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION

Interior Lights

95

Instruments

andControls

Courtesy LightOn vehicles with navigation system

The courtesy light between the maplights comes on when you turn theparking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the select/resetknob on the instrument panel (seepage 72).

Ceiling Light

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON, Door Activated, and OFF.In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on when you:● Open any door.● Remove the key from the ignition.If you do not open a door, the lightfades out in about 30 seconds.

● Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

Cargo Area LightThe cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the centerposition, the light comes on whenyou open the hatch.Ignition Switch LightThe ignition switch light comes onwhen you unlock the driver's door,and fades out about 30 seconds afteryou close the door.

COURTESY LIGHT

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

Interior Lights

96

ꭧ: If equipped.

CARGO AREA CARGO AREASIDE POCKET

COIN TRAY

DOOR POCKETS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

LX model EX model

OVERHEAD CONSOLEꭧ

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKET

GLOVE BOX

CENTER LOWERPOCKETꭧ

SEAT-BACK POCKETꭧ

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKET

VANITY MIRRORSꭧ

SC model

BEVERAGEHOLDERS

Interior Convenience Items

97

Instruments

andControls

Cooler BoxOn EX model

There is a cooler box between thedriver's and passenger's seats.To open the cooler box, slide the tabbackward, and pull up the lid.The lid has a breakaway feature. Ifthe lid is rotated back too far it willbreak away from the box withoutdamage.

To reinstall the lid, vertically set therear lid hinge to the pins on the boxand push down. The lid must bevertical as shown in the illustration.

To remove the cooler box, rotate thehandle up to the unlocked position.Slide the console towards the rear ofthe vehicle then lift the console.

TAB


98

To reinstall the cooler box, set thecooler box into the floor base, thenslide the cooler box forward.Rotate the handle down to the lockedposition.Make sure the cooler box is securelylocked in place. A cooler box that isnot locked in place could become aprojectile and cause injury in asudden stop or crash.If you take the cooler box out, put itin a safe place outside the vehicle.

NOTE: The cooler box must belocked to floor base while driving.

Beverage HoldersBe careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

The front beverage holder isremovable. To remove it, push thetab and pull it up.

SC model is shown.


99

Instruments

andControls

Accessory Power SocketsYour vehicle has one, two, or threeaccessory power sockets, dependingon the model. All models have a frontaccessory power socket on thedashboard above the glove box.EX and SC models have an accessorypower socket in the cargo area onthe passenger's side.The SC model has one additionalsocket in the center console.These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessories thatare rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less (10amps).

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Sun Visor

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.Do not use the extended sun visorover the inside mirror.Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

Slide


100

Vanity MirrorOn EX and SC models

To use the vanity mirror on the backof the sun visor, pull up the cover.

Overhead ConsoleOn EX and SC models

To open the overhead console, pushon the rear edge or slide the tab asshown in the illustration. It willunlatch and swing down. To close it,push it until it latches. Make sure theholder is closed while you aredriving.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they are smallenough to let the holder close andlatch, and that they are not heavyenough to cause the holder to popopen while driving.

Push

SlideSlide


101

Instruments

andControls

102

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment in allweather conditions.

The standard audio system has manyfeatures. This section describes thosefeatures and how to use them. (If youhave an optional audio system, refer tothe operating instructions that camewith it.)

On EX and SC modelsYour vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code number toenable it.

Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 104Air Flow Controls..................... 105Ventilation ............................... 106Using the Heater ..................... 106Using the A/C ......................... 106Dehumidify the Interior ........... 107

To Defog and Defrost .............. 107To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice

From the Windows .............. 108To Turn Everything Off............ 108

Audio System .............................. 109Playing the FM/AM Radio

(Models without navigationsystem)................................ 110

Playing the XM® Radio (Modelswithout navigation system) ...... 113

Playing a Disc (Models withoutnavigation system)................... 119

Disc Player Error Messages(Models without navigation

system)................................ 125Disc Changer Error Messages

(Models without navigationsystem)................................ 126

Playing the FM/AM Radio(Models with navigation

system)................................ 127Playing the XM® Radio (Models

with navigation system) ........... 132Playing a Disc (Models with

navigation system)................... 140

Disc Player Error Messages(Models with navigation

system)................................ 148Playing a PC Card (Models with

navigation system)................... 149PC Card Error Messages (Models

with navigation system) ........... 161Playing an iPod® (Models with

navigation system)................... 162iPod® Error Messages (Models

with navigation system) ........... 172Playing a USB Flash Memory

Device (Models with navigationsystem)................................ 173

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages (Models with

navigation system) ............... 182Protecting Your Discs .................. 183FM/AM Radio Reception............. 186Radio Theft Protection ................. 188Setting the Clock ......................... 189Remote Audio Controls ................ 191Auxiliary Input Jack ..................... 192Cruise Control ............................. 193Rearview Camera and Monitor ..... 196

Features

103

Features

FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE CONTROL DIAL

DEFROST POSITION

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGERBUTTON

MAX A/C POSITION

A/C (AIR CONDITIONING)BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

Vents, Heating, and A/C

104

Air Flow ControlsFan Control DialTurn this dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow.Temperature Control DialTurning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonThis button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on when theA/C is on.Recirculation ButtonWhen the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle's interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.The system should be left in fresh airmode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.Rear Window Defogger ButtonThis button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 74).Mode Control DialUse the mode control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard vents inall modes.

The system automatically turnson the A/C and switches to

recirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard (see page 106).

Air flows from the center andcorner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided between thevents in the dashboard and the floorvents.

Air flows from the floor vents.When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.

Airflow is divided between thefloor vents and the defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

CONTINUED


105

Features

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator does not come on.VentilationThe flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then dischargesit through vents near the tailgate.1. Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.

2. Make sure the A/C is off.3. Select and fresh air mode.4. Set the fan to the desired speed.

Using the HeaterThe heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.1. Select and fresh air mode.2. Set the fan to the desired speed.3. Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Using the A/CAir conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page67). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.1. Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.

2. Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.

3. Select .4. If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.

5. Set the fan to the desired speed.If the interior is very warm, you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan to maximumspeed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:

1. Set the mode control dial to MAXA/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects and switchesto recirculation mode.

2. Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.

3. Set the fan to the desired speed.


106

Dehumidify the InteriorAir conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.1. Turn the fan on.2. Turn on the air conditioning.3. Select and fresh air mode.4. Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To Defog and DefrostTo remove fog from the inside of thewindows:1. Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.

2. Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas off to start with.

3. Adjust the temperature control dialso the airflow feels warm.

4. Select to help clear the rearwindow.

5. To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

When you select or , thesystem automatically turns on theA/C. This helps to dehumidify the airand to defog the windshield. In eithermode, you cannot turn off the A/C.When you switch to another mode,the A/C returns to its originalsetting, either on or off.


107

Features

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows1. Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator does not come on ifthe A/C was off to start with.

2. Select .3. Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

4. Select to help clear the rearwindow.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the tab below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To Turn Everything OffTurning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.● Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

● To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.


108

An audio system is standard on allmodels. Read the appropriate pages(as shown below) to use yourvehicle's audio system.For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages 110 through 126.For vehicles with navigation system,see pages 127 through 182.

LX model EX and SC models

U.S. EX and SC models with navigation system

Audio System

109

Features

LX model EX and SC models

AM/FM BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON

SCANINDICATOR

VOL/PWRKNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

A.SELBUTTON

VOL/PWR KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

A.SEL BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTON

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

110

To Play the RadioThe ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Turn the system on bypushing the VOL/PWR knob or theAM/FM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.To Select a StationYou can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.TUNE － Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

SEEK－ The seek function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, presseither ( or ), then release it.SCAN－ The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds (LX model) or 10seconds (EX and SC models).If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 5 seconds (LX model)or 10 seconds (EX and SC models).When it plays a station you want tolisten to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Preset－ Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

2. Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

3. Pick a preset number (1－6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

CONTINUED


111

Features

AUTO SELECT－ If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.Press the A.SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations in thepreset buttons.You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can store otherfrequencies on the preset buttons aspreviously described.

To turn off auto select, press the A.SELbutton. This restores the presets youoriginally set.

For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page186.Adjusting the SoundPress the MODE or SOUND knobrepeatedly to display the bass (BAS),treble (TRE), balance (BAL), fader(FAD), and sub-woofer (SUB-W)ꭧsettings.ꭧ: If equippedEach mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the MODE orSOUND knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in thedisplay. The system willautomatically return the display tothe selected audio mode about 5seconds after you stop adjusting amode.

Balance/Fader － These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.Treble/Bass/Sub-Woofer － Usethe TRE/BAS/SUB-W modes toadjust the tone to your liking.


112

XM® RadioOn EX and SC modelsYour vehicle is capable of receivingXM® Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates, and Canada except Hawaii,Alaska and Puerto Rico. XM is aregistered trademark of Sirius XMRadio®, Inc. and XM CANADA® is aregistered business name ofCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORYBUTTONS

TUNEKNOB

SCANBUTTON

VOL/PWR KNOB XM BUTTON

CHANNEL INDICATOR

CATEGORY INDICATOR

DISP/MODE BUTTON

CONTINUED

Playing the XM® Radio (Models without navigation system)

113

Features

XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

Operating the XM RadioTo listen to the XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. Push theVOL/PWR knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the XM button.Adjust the volume by turning theVOL/PWR knob. The last channelyou listened to will show in thedisplay.MODE－ To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes.In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist's name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.TUNE－ Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.CATEGORY ( or )－ Presseither button to select anothercategory.


114

SCAN － The scan function givesyou sampling of all channels while inthe channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton.

Preset－ You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.To store a channel:1. Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

2. Use the TUNE knob, theCATEGORY buttons, or the SCANbuttons to tune to a desiredchannel.In category mode, only channelswithin that category can beselected. In channel mode, allchannels can be selected.

3. Pick the preset button you want forthat channel. Press and hold thebutton until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

5. Press the XM button again. Theother XM band will show. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button totune to it.

CONTINUED


115

Features

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’ － XM is loading theaudio or program information.‘‘OFF AIR’’－ The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.‘‘UPDATING’’ － The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ － The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.‘‘ ’’－ The selected channelnumber does not exist, is not part ofyour subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.‘‘ANTENNA’’ － There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.


116

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Signal may be blockedby mountains or largeobstacles to the south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

CONTINUED


117

Features

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:● Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

● Driving on the north side of a largecommercial truck on an east/westroad.

● Driving in tunnels.● Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

● Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

● Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

● Large items carried on a roof rack.There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.Receiving XM Radio ServiceIf your XM Radio service has expired oryou purchased your vehicle from aprevious owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts available onXM Radio. With the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,push the VOL/PWR knob to turn on theaudio system and press the XM button. Avariety of music types and styles willplay.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio atwww.xmradio.com, or at 1-800-852-9696.In Canada, contact XM CANADA atwww.xmradio.ca, or at 1-877-209-0079.You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number.To get your radio I.D. number, turn theTUNE knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in thedisplay. Your I.D. will appear in thedisplay.

After you've registered with XM Radio,keep your audio system in the XM Radiomode while you wait for activation. Thisshould take about 30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, make sureyour vehicle remains in an open areawith good reception. Once your audiosystem is activated, you'll be able tolisten to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radiowill continue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hours fromthe activation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours, contactXM Radio. In Canada, contact XMCANADA.


118

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

DISC INDICATOR

FOLDER KNOBSEEK/SKIPBUTTONS

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTONSEEK/SKIP BAR

VOL/PWRKNOB RANDOM INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

EJECT BUTTONCD/TAPE BUTTON

CD SLOT

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

FOLDER INDICATOR

EX and SC modelsLX model

RANDOM INDICATOR

DISPLAY BUTTON

RPT (REPEAT)BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

VOL/PWRKNOB

CONTINUED

Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

119

Features

To Play a DiscTo load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CD/TAPE or the CD/AUX button. Youwill see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. Thenumber of the track playing is shownin the display. The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes.Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.

On EX and SC modelsThe disc player can also play CD-Rsand CD-RWs compressed in MP3 orWMA formats.When playing a disc in MP3, you willsee ‘‘MP3’’ in the display. The folderand track numbers are displayed.Each disc can hold up to 400 playablefiles within 8 folder layers. A disc cansupport a maximum number of 100folders, and each folder can hold 255playable files.The specifications for compatibleMP3 file are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

– Bitrate:8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320kbps

– Compatible with variable bitrateand multi-session

When playing a disc in WMA, youwill see ‘‘WMA’’ in the display. Thefolder and track numbers aredisplayed. Each disc can hold up to200 files within 16 subdirectories, 8folder layers. A disc can support amaximum number of 100 folders, andeach folder can hold 255 playablefiles.The specifications for compatibleWMA file are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps


NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMAdisc is protected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.


120

Insert the disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it. When the system reaches theend of the disc, it will return to thebeginning and play the disc again.To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD/TAPE or CD/AUXbutton again to switch back to theCD player.

If you turn the system off while a discis playing, either with the VOL/PWRknob or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the disc will begin playing where itleft off.On EX and SC modelsIf you press the DISP/MODE buttonwhile playing a disc, additionalinformation (track, album, artist, etc.)may be displayed.To Change or Select Tracks/FilesOn EX and SC modelsUse the SEEK/SKIP button while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3/WMAmode).In MP3/WMA mode, use theFOLDER knob to select folders inthe disc, and use the SEEK/SKIPbutton to change files.

SEEK/SKIP－ Each time you pressand release the , the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (files in MP3/WMA mode).Press and release the to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skip tothe beginning of the previous track.To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold or .On LX modelsYou will see CUE or REW in thedisplay while moving within a track.

CONTINUED


121

Features

REPEAT (TRACK/FILE REPEAT)－ To continuously replay a track(files in MP3/WMA mode), pressand release the RPT button. You willsee RPT in the display. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.On EX and SC modelsIn MP3/WMA modeFOLDER SELECTION－ To selecta different folder, use the FOLDERknob to move to the beginning of thenext folder. Turn the knob right tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Turn the knob left to skip tothe beginning of the previous folder.

On EX and SC modelsIn MP3/WMA modeFOLDER-REPEAT － This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat, press andhold the RPT button for 2 seconds.You will see RPT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press and hold theRPT button for 2 seconds to turn itoff.RANDOM (Random within a Disc)－ This feature plays the tracks (allfiles in each folder in MP3/WMAmode) within a disc in random order.To activate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. Press the RDMbutton again to return to normal play.

On EX and SC modelsIn MP3/WMA modeFOLDER-RANDOM － Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles within a folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed in MP3/WMA. Toactivate folder random play, pressand hold the RDM button. You willsee RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and play filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random play bypressing the RDM button again orselecting a different folder with theFOLDER knob.


122

On EX and SC modelsSCAN － The scan function samplesall tracks/files on the disc in theorder they are recorded. To activatescan, press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press the SCANbutton again to exit scan and play thelast track/file sampled.Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button also turns off scan.

On EX and SC modelsIn MP3/WMA modeFOLDER SCAN－ This feature,when activated, samples all files onthe selected folder in order. Toactivate folder scan, press and holdthe SCAN button until you hear abeep. You will see SCAN in thedisplay. The system will then playthe first file for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first file in each folder for 10seconds. When it plays a file youwant to continue listening to, pressthe SCAN button again.Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button or selecting a differentfolder with the FOLDER knob alsoturns off folder scan.

To Stop Playing a DiscPress the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe disc after 10 seconds (EX and SCmodels) or 15 seconds (LX model)and put it in pause mode. To beginplaying, press the CD/TAPE or CD/AUX button.Press the AM/FM button to switchto the radio while a disc is playing.To play the disc, press the CD/TAPEor CD/AUX button.If you turn the system off while a discis playing, either with the VOL/PWRknob or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the disc will begin playing where itleft off.

CONTINUED


123

Features

Audio System MalfunctionSee pages 125 and 126 forinformation on error messages.Protecting DiscsFor information on how to handleand protect discs, see page 183.

Operating the Optional DiscChangerOn LX modelAn optional six disc changer isavailable for your vehicle. This discchanger uses the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player or theradio.Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.To select the disc changer, press theCD/TAPE button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 5(DISC－) or the preset 6 (DISC＋)button. To select the previous disc,press the preset 5 (DISC－), or thepreset 6 (DISC＋) to select the nextdisc in sequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will search forthe next available disc to load andplay.


124

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page 184.The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out thedisc.Insert a different disc. If the new discplays, there is a problem with thefirst disc. If the error message cyclerepeats and you cannot clear it, takeyour vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage Cause Solution

ꐀ HEAT ERROR High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.ꐁ HOT

ꐀ FORMATTrack/File format notsupported

Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.

ꐁ DISC FOCUS errorPress the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 184.

ꐀ

BAD DISCPLEASECHECK

OWNER'SMANUAL

PUSH EJECT

Mechanical error

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirtsee page 184.Insert the disc again. If the code does notdisappear, or the disc cannot be removed,consult your dealer. Do not try to force the discout of the player.

ꐁ ERR

ꐀ

BAD DISCPLEASECHECK

OWNER'SMANUAL

Servo error

ꐀ: EX and SC modelsꐁ: LX model

Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

125

Features

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.


DISC FOCUS error

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 184.

NO No disc in the magazine Insert disc.

ERR Mechanical error

Press the EJECT button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.For more information, see page 184.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.

HOTHigh temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to

normal.

EJECNo magazine in thechanger

Insert magazine.

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

126

Voice Control SystemIn addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.

Playing the FM/AM Radio

AUTO SELECTICON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

TUNER BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

SOUND ICON

BACKGROUNDICON

FM1 ICON

FM2 ICON

AM ICON

CONTINUED

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models with navigation system)

127

Features

To Play the FM/AM RadioThe ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen each time youoperate any of the control buttons.On the navigation screen, you canalso see audio information bytouching the AUDIO INFO icon onthe lower of the screen.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2). On the FM band, STEREOwill be displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.For information on XM Radio, seepage 132.

To Select a StationYou can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.TUNE－ Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tune toa higher frequency, and press theside to tune to a lower frequency.Press and hold the or side of theTUNE bar until you hear two beepsto change the frequency rapidly.Release the bar when the displayreaches the desired frequency.SEEK－ The seek function searchesup and down from the currentfrequency to find a station with astrong signal. To activate it, pressand hold the or side of theTUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.


128

SCAN － The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Preset－ Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storesix stations each.

2. Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

3. Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Each preset button's frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

AUTO SELECT － If you aretraveling and can no longer receiveyour preset stations, you can use theauto select feature to find stations inthe local area.Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then press theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashing in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

CONTINUED


129

Features

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can store otherfrequencies on the preset buttons aspreviously described.To turn off auto select, press the AUTOSEL icon. This restores the presetsyou originally set.For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page186.

Adjusting the Sound

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

BASS－ Adjusts the bass.TREBLE－ Adjusts the treble. Toadjust the treble and bass, touchor on each side of the treble orbass adjustment bar. The adjustmentbar on the right lower display showsyou the current setting.FADER－ Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.

SOUND ICON

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTING


130

BALANCE － Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.SUBWOOFER－ Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker. To adjust thesound strength, touch or oneach side of the adjustment bar.The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)－ The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

This function is set to Mid as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory. If you feel thesound is too loud, choose low. If youfeel the sound is too quiet, chooseHi.You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenmove the joystick left or right tochange the setting.The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

Screen ModeYou can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.Audio System LightingYou can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage 72). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.


131

Features

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/XM (XM RADIO)BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

CHANNELINDICATOR

TUNE BAR PRESET BUTTONS

XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON

Playing the XM® Radio (Models with navigation system)

132

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM® Radio anywhere in the UnitedStates, and Canada except Hawaii,Alaska and Puerto Rico. XM is aregistered trademark of Sirius XMRadio®, Inc. and XM CANADA® is aregistered business name ofCanadian Satellite Radio Inc.XM Radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM Radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.When you press and hold theAUDIO button, the display alsoshows all XM information.

Operating the XM RadioTo listen to XM Radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Press theCD/XM button to select XM Radio.Adjust the volume by turning theknob. The last channel you listenedto will show in the display.You can also change to the XM Radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, disc, PC card,etc., by touching the XM1 or XM2icon on the audio display.You can also operate the radio usingthe control buttons on the left side ofthe screen. The status bar appears onthe bottom of the screen each timeyou press any of the control buttons.On the navigation screen, you canalso see the audio information bytouching the AUDIO INFO icon onthe lower of the screen.

MODE－ To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,touch the MODE icon. In channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category. Eachtime you touch and release theMODE icon, the display changesbetween the channel mode and thecategory mode.

CONTINUED


133

Features

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist's name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

TUNE－ Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Pressfor higher numbered channels andfor lower numbered channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.CATEGORY－ Press and holdeither side of the TUNE bar ( or

) until you hear a beep to selectanother category.SCAN－ The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

Preset－ You can store up to 12preset channels using each presetbutton or preset icons on the screen.Each preset button or icon stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.To store a channel:1. Press the CD/XM button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will show in thedisplay.

2. Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.3. Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.


134

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

5. Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it. Each presetbutton's channel is shown on thebottom of the audio display.

To Select a Channel from List

You can also select a desired channelfrom the list shown on the screen.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio control display on thenavigation screen.

Touch the CHANNEL LIST icon toswitch the display to the channel listwhich shows all channels in allcategories. Select and touch adesired channel.To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

CHANNEL LIST ICON

CONTINUED


135

Features

To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’－ XM is loading theaudio or program information.‘‘OFF AIR’’ － The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.‘‘UPDATING’’ － The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ － The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.‘‘ ’’ － The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.‘‘NO INFO’’ － This channel has noartist or title information at this time.‘‘ANTENNA’’－ There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.


136

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

CONTINUED


137

Features

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:● Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

● Driving on the north side of a largecommercial truck on an east/westroad.

● Driving in tunnels.● Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.

● Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.

● Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

● Large items carried on a roof rack.There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM Radioreception.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

Receiving XM Radio ServiceIf your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle from aprevious owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Radio. With the ignitionswitch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II) position, push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system andpress the CD/XM button. A varietyof music types and styles will play.

If you decide to purchase XM Radioservice, contact XM Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at 1-800-852-9696. InCanada, contact XM CANADA atwww.xmradio.ca, or at 1-877-209-0079.You will need to give them your radioI.D. number and your credit cardnumber. To get your radio I.D.number, press the TUNE bar until‘‘0’’ appears in the display. Your I.D.will appear in the display.After you've registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theXM Radio mode while you wait foractivation. This should take about 30minutes.


138

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you'll beable to listen to XM Radiobroadcasts. XM Radio will continueto send an activation signal to yourvehicle for at least 12 hours from theactivation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours,contact XM Radio. In Canada, contactXM CANADA.


139

Features

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

JOYSTICK

RPT (REPEAT) BUTTON

CD ICON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

140

To Play a DiscYou operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toload or play discs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.


This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. When playinga disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ onthe screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear on the screen. You canselect up to 99 folders and play up to999 tracks. If the disc has a complexstructure, it takes a while to read thedisc before the system begins to playit.

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen by pressing andholding CD/XM button until youhear a beep.Video CDs and DVDs do not work inthis unit.The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

– Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)


–Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:– Sampling frequency:22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bitrate:32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbps

– Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session

– Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays CD FORMAT, and thenskips to the next file.

CONTINUED


141

Features

To Load a Disc

The disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc player appears.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded screen as a tray. If youput a cup, for example, on the screen,the liquid inside the cup may spill onthe screen when you go over a bump.

OPEN BUTTON

DISC SLOT

CLOSE BUTTON


142

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the disc player.You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD/XM button. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.On the navigation screen, you cansee the audio information wheneveryou touch the AUDIO INFO icon onthe lower portion of the screen.When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audiodisplay. When playing a disc in MP3or WMA, the folder number andname, the file number and name, theartist name, and the elapsed time areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.If the disc was not recorded with textdata, it will not be displayed.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button'sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press theENT on the top of the joystick toselect the icon.SKIP－ Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release

(preset 5) to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.FF/REW－ To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold

(preset 4) or (preset 3).

PRESET BUTTON'S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONS

CONTINUED


143

Features

In MP3 or WMA modeFOLDER SELECTION－ To selecta different folder, press either side ofthe TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skip tothe next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of theprevious folder.TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT)－ To continuously replay a track(file in MP3 or WMA mode), pressand release the RPT button (preset1). You will see TRACK REPEAT inthe display. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

In MP3 or WMA modeFOLDER REPEAT－ This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeFOLDER REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff folder repeat.TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder) － Thisfeature plays the tracks within a disc(the files within a folder) in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display. Press theRDM button again to return tonormal play.

In MP3 or WMA modeFOLDER RANDOM－ Thisfeature, when activated, plays all filesin each folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed. To activate folderrandom, press and hold the RDMbutton (preset 2). You will seeFOLDER RANDOM in the display.The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing the RDM button again, or ifyou select a different folder with theTUNE bar.


144

SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)－The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press the SCAN button again toget out of scan mode and play thelast track/file sampled.Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6) also turns off scan.

In MP3 or WMA modeFOLDER SCAN－ This feature,when activated, samples all the firstfiles in each folder on the disc inorder. To activate folder scan, pressand hold the SCAN button. You willsee FOLDER SCAN in the display.The system plays the first file in eachfolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system then plays thefirst file in each folder for 10 secondseach. After playing the first file of thelast folder, the system goes to normalplaying.Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6), or selecting a different folderwith the TUNE bar, or pressing theSCAN button, also turns off folderscan.

Using a Track List

You can also select a track/filedirectly from the folder and file listson the audio display. Press theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay.

FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE LIST

FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON

CONTINUED


145

Features

Touch the Track List icon to switchthe display to the folder list, thenselect and touch a desired folder.

The display changes to the file list.Then, select and touch a desired file.Touch the folder icon on the upperleft of the screen to move to theparent folder.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber is also displayed.If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number isshown.

FOLDER ICON FOLDER LIST

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE LIST

RETURN ICON


146

To Stop Playing a DiscTo play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audiounit, touch the CARD icon to play thePC card. Press the CD/XM buttonagain or touch the CD icon to switchback to the disc player.To play an audio unit connected tothe auxiliary input jack or the USBadapter cable when a disc is playing,touch the AUX icon.If you turn the system off while a discis playing, either with the power/volume knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

Removing a DiscTo remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page 142). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) to removethe disc. If you eject the disc, but donot remove it from the slot, thesystem will automatically reload itafter 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD/XM button.To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

Protecting DiscsFor information on how to handleand protect discs, see page 183.


147

Features

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.For additional information ondamaged discs, see page 184.If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.Insert a different disc. If the new discplays, there is a problem with thefirst disc. If the error message cyclerepeats and you cannot clear it, takeyour vehicle to a dealer.


FOCUS Error

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged(see page 184).

Mechanical Error

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation (seepage 184).If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.

TOC ErrorPress the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation (seepage 184).

High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

148

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

JOYSTICK

PLAY MODEICONOPEN BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

TRACK LIST ICON PC CARD ICON

RPT (REPEAT) BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

CONTINUED

Playing a PC Card (Models with navigation system)

149

Features

To Play a PC CardYou operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the disc player. To load or play acard, the ignition switch must be inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ whena card is playing. The card limit ofthe player is 99 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:CompactFlashFlash ATASD memory card

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.NOTE:

● When you insert a PC card into theslot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

● Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

● To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

● You cannot close the screen (moveit to the upright position) until thePC card is inserted all the way intoits slot or removed.

● Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

– Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)




150

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bitrate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps



In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

Loading a PC Card

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on the bottomof the screen. On the navigationscreen, you can see the audioinformation whenever you touch theAUDIO INFO icon on the screen.

PC CARD SLOT

CONTINUED


151

Features

There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.● Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

● Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

● Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks when theywere added to the card, it will not bedisplayed on the screen.

To Select a Play Mode

ARTIST MODEPLAY MODE ICON

FOLDER MODEPLAY MODE ICON

ALBUM MODEPLAY MODE ICON

MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

MODE INDICATOR


152

To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press the ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘Continue playing the current song,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode after playing the currentfile.

PLAY MODE ICON

CONTINUED


153

Features

If you select ‘‘Play a new track list,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the files in order to the new list.To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button's function isshown on the bottom of the screen.Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress the ENT on the top of thejoystick to select the icon.

SKIP－ Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.FF/REW－ To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4) or

(preset 3).FOLDER SELECTION－ To selecta different folder, press either side ofthe TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skip tothe next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of theprevious folder.

PRESET BUTTON'S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONS


154

TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT)－ To continuously replay a file,press and release the RPT button(preset 1). You will see TRACKREPEAT in the display. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT － This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files in theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2seconds. You will see FOLDERREPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT orALBUM REPEAT in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder/artist/album. Pressand hold the RPT button for 2seconds again to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM button, or selecting adifferent folder/artist/album with theTUNE bar also turns off the repeatfeature.

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder) － This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate trackrandom, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press the RDM button again toreturn to normal play.FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM－ This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, press and hold theRDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.You will see FOLDER RANDOM,ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUMRANDOM in the display.

The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again, oryou select a different folder with theTUNE bar (in FOLDER RANDOMmode).SCAN－ The scan function samplesall files on the PC card in the orderthey are recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file on the PC card.Press the SCAN button again to getout of scan mode and play the last filesampled.Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scanfeature.

CONTINUED


155

Features

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM SCAN－ This feature, when activated,samples the first file in each folder/artist/album on the PC card in order.To activate each scan feature, pressand hold the SCAN button until youhear a beep. You will see FOLDERSCAN, ARTIST SCAN or ALBUMSCAN in the display.The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6), selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar (inFOLDER RANDOMmode), orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the scan feature.

Using a Track List

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

TRACK LIST ICON

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON


156

To select a folder, touch its icon onthe screen. The display changes tothe file list, then select a file. In foldermode, touch the folder icon on theupper left of the screen to move tothe parent folder. The current folderis highlighted in blue.

In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.

In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it to an appropriatedirection, then press ENT.

ARTIST NAME ALBUM NAME

CONTINUED


157

Features

To go back to the normal playingdisplay, press the AUDIO button.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio mode display.

Song Search Function

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ fromthe track list display, the song searchmenu appears.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title byKeyword, Artist, and Album.

RETURN ICONFolder mode is shown.

SONG SEARCH ICON

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON


158

Searching for a Song Title by Keyword

In Title by Keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Press the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the screen, thedisplay returns to the mode menuwithout doing a search.

To cancel the selected letter, selectthe letter and touch the Delete icon.To select more characters, touch theMore icon. The other character listwill be shown.

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing the ENT.

Searching for a Song by Artist Name

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist's file list is displayed.

MORE ICON

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

FILE LIST

ARTIST LIST

CONTINUED


159

Features

Searching for a Song by Album Name

Select the Album icon, and the albumlist appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

To Stop Playing a PC CardTo play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a disc is in the audiounit, press the CD/XM button ortouch the CD icon to play the disc.Touch the CARD icon to switch backto the PC card player.To play an audio unit connected tothe auxiliary input jack or the USBadapter cable when a PC card isplaying, touch the AUX icon.If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turning offthe ignition switch, the card will stayin the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

Removing a PC CardTo remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page151). Press the eject button ( ) toremove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.

ALBUM LIST


160

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a PC card, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

ErrorMessage Solution

FILE ERRORThe system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. There is apossibility that the files have been damaged

NOMUSICIt appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMA files inthe PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.

MEDIA ERRORIt appears when an unsupported PC card is inserted. The system supportsCompactFlash card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk memory Card Adapter.

PC Card Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

161

Features

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

JOYSTICK

AUDIO CONTROLDISPLAY

CD/XM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

USB ICON

RPT (REPEAT) BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

MAP BUTTON

Playing an iPod® (Models with navigation system)

162

To Play an iPod®

This audio system can select andplay the audio files on the iPod® withthe same controls used for thein-dash disc player. To play an iPod,connect it to the USB adapter cablein the glove box by using your dockconnector. Press the AUDIO buttonbeside the screen to show the audiodisplay and touch the AUX icon. Theignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.The iPod will also be recharged withthe ignition switch in these positions.You can also select an icon bymoving the joystick. Move it to left,right, up, or down to change thehighlighting and scroll through lists,then press ENT on the top of thejoystick to set your selection.

To select the USB mode withoutusing the icon, press the CD/XMbutton repeatedly. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.The audio system reads and playssound files to be playable on theiPod. The system cannot operate aniPod as a mass storage device. Thesystem will only play songs stored onthe iPod with iTunes.iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

Voice Control SystemYou can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.iPods compatible with your audiosystem using the USB adapter cableare:

Model SoftwareiPod classic Ver. 1.0 or moreiPod with video(iPod 5thgeneration)

Ver. 1.2 or more

iPod nano Ver. 1.2 or moreiPod nano 2ndgeneration

Ver. 1.1.2 or more

iPod nano 3rdgeneration

Ver. 1.0 or more

iPod nano 4thgeneration

Ver. 1.0.2 or more

iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or moreiPod touch 2ndgeneration

Ver. 2.1.1 or more

CONTINUED


163

Features

Use only compatible iPods with thelatest software. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.NOTE:

● Do not connect your iPod using aHUB.

● Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

● Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

● We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

● Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.

Connecting an iPod

1. Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder and remove the cablefrom the clip in the glove box.

CABLE USB CONNECTOR


164

2. Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

3. Install the dock connector to theUSB adapter cable securely.

If the iPod indicator does not appearin the audio display, check theconnections, and try to reconnect theiPod a few times.

If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at www.apple.com/ipod.

When the iPod is connected and theaudio display is selected on thescreen by pressing the AUDIObutton, the AUX icon switches to theUSB icon. The display also shows thecurrent file number and total of theselected playable files, the artist,album and track (file) names on thenavigation screen.

USB ADAPTERCABLE

DOCKCONNECTOR

CONTINUED


165

Features

On the map screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower part of the screen.

To Change or Select Files

Use the preset buttons while an iPodis playing to select passages andchange files. Each preset button'sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

SKIP－ Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.FF/REW－ To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4) or

(preset 3).AUDIO INFO ICON


166

Using a Track List

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.

To Select a File from iPod Menu

You can also select a file from theiPod menu: playlists, artists, albumsand songs. Press the AUDIO buttonto display the audio display on thenavigation screen. Touch the iPodMENU icon to display the iPodmenu.

AUDIO DISPLAY

iPod MENU ICON

CONTINUED


167

Features

Select a desired list by touching theappropriate icon.

The display shows the items on thatlist. Touch a desired file.To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.If you select ‘‘ALL’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio display on the screen.


168

To Select Repeat or Random Mode:You can select any type of repeat andrandom modes with the RPT andRDM buttons. To confirm theselected mode, press the AUDIObutton to show the audio display onthe navigation screen.

TRACK REPEAT－ This featurecontinuously plays a track/file. Toactivate track repeat, press andrelease the RPT button (preset 1).You will see REPEAT in the display.To turn it off, press and release theRPT button again.Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changesbetween track repeat and normalplay.Pressing either SKIP button changesthe file while keeping this feature.

TRACK RANDOM－ This featureplays all available tracks/files fromthe selected items in the iPod menulist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatetrack random, press and release theRDM button (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM on the screen.

CONTINUED


169

Features

ALBUM RANDOM－ This featureplays all available albums from theselected item in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs) inrandom order. The tracks/files ineach album are played in therecorded order. To activate albumrandom, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2) repeatedly until yousee ALBUM RANDOM on thescreen.Press and hold the button until youhear a beep to turn off either randommode.You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.NOTE:Available operating functions vary onmodels or versions. Some functionsmay not be available on the vehicle'saudio system.

To Stop Playing Your iPodTo play the radio when an iPod isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a disc is in the audiounit, press the CD/XM button ortouch the CD icon to play the disc. Ifa PC card is in the audio unit, Pressthe CD/XM button or touch theCARD icon to play a PC card.Press the CD/XM button again ortouch the AUX icon to switch back tothe iPod.

Disconnecting an iPodYou can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see the ‘‘OK todisconnect’’ messageꭧ in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you seethe ‘‘OK to disconnect’’ message inthe iPod display before youdisconnect it. Make sure to followthe iPod's instructions on how todisconnect the dock connector fromthe USB adapter cable.ꭧ: The displayed message may varyon models or versions. On somemodels, there is no message todisconnect.When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the audio screen (ifselected) shows NO DATA.If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.


170

iPod Error MessagesIf you see an error message in thescreen, see page 172.


171

Features

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing an iPod, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.


UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.NO SONG There is no music information.

iPod® Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

172

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

JOYSTICK

SCAN BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

MP3 INDICATOR

USB ICON

RPT (REPEAT) BUTTON

RDM (RANDOM)BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

SOUND ICON

TRACK LISTICON

CONTINUED

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

173

Features

To Play a USB Flash MemoryDeviceThis audio system can select andplay the audio files from a USB flashmemory device with the samecontrols used for the in-dash discplayer. To play a USB flash memorydevice, connect it to the USB adaptercable in the glove box. The ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. Press theAUDIO button beside the screen toshow the audio display and touch theAUX icon.You can also select an icon bymoving the joystick. Move it to left,right, up, or down to change thehighlighting and scroll through lists,then press ENT on the top of thejoystick to set your selection.

To select the USB mode withoutusing the icon, press the CD/XMbutton repeatedly. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAACꭧ formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.ꭧ: Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 MB orhigher and formatted with the FATfile system. Some digital audioplayers may be compatible as well.Some USB flash memory devices(such as devices with security lock-out features, etc.) will not work inthis audio unit.


174

NOTE:

● Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

● Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a HUB.

● Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

● Do not keep the USB flashmemory device in the vehicle.Direct sunlight and high heat willdamage it.

● We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

● Some devices cannot be poweredor charged via the USB adapter. Ifthis is the case, use the accessoryadapter to supply power to yourdevice.

● Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

● Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Voice Control SystemYou can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

– Bitrate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)

– Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio Layer3

– Partition: Top partition only– Maximum layers: 8

CONTINUED


175

Features

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bitrate:48－320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

– Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

– Partition: Top partition only– Maximum layers: 8

The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:– Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bitrate:48－320 kbps

– Supported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LC

– Partition: Top partition only–Maximum layers: 8

Even if recorded in MP3, WMA orAAC format, a file with anunsupported version cannot beplayed. If the system finds anunsupported file, the screen displaysUNSUPPORTED, and then skips tothe next file.In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the screen displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.


176

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice

1. Pull out the USB connector fromthe holder and remove the cablefrom the clip in the glove box.

2. Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB adapter cablecorrectly and securely.

When the USB device is connectedand the audio display is selected onthe screen by pressing the AUDIObutton, the AUX icon switches to theUSB icon. The display also shows thefolder and file numbers, and theelapsed time.

On the map screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower part of the screen.

CABLE USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLEAUDIO INFO ICON

CONTINUED


177

Features

To Change or Select Files

Use the preset buttons while a USBflash memory device is playing toselect passages and change files.Each preset button's function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

SKIP－ Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press and release

(preset 5) to skip backward tothe beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.FF/REW－ To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4) or

(preset 3).FOLDER SELECTION － To selecta different folder, press and releaseeither side of the TUNE bar. Pressthe side to skip to the next folder,and press the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

You can also select a folder and filefrom the lists shown on the screen.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display on the navigationscreen.

TRACK LIST ICON


178

Touch the Track List icon to switchthe display to the folder list, thenselect and touch a desired folder.

The display changes to the file list.Then, select and touch a desired file.Touch the folder icon on the upperleft of the screen to move to theparent folder.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.To select a desired icon with thejoystick, move it in the appropriatedirection, then press ENT.Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio display on the screen.

FOLDER LIST FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE LIST

CONTINUED


179

Features

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes with theRPT, RDM and SCAN buttons. Toconfirm the selected mode, press theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay on the navigation screen.TRACK REPEAT－ This featurecontinuously plays a track/file. Toactivate track repeat, press andrelease the RPT button (preset 1).You will see TRACK REPEAT in thedisplay.

FOLDER REPEAT－ This featurereplays all the tracks/files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate folder repeat,press and hold the RPT button(preset 1) until you see FOLDERREPEAT in the display.Press and release the button to turnoff either repeat mode. Pressingeither side of the TUNE bar alsoturns off this feature.

TRACK RANDOM－ This featureplays all the tracks/files in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display.FOLDER RANDOM－ This featureplays the tracks/files in the selectedfolder in random order. To activatefolder random, press and hold theRDM button (preset 2) until you seeFOLDER RANDOM in the display.Press and release the button to turnoff either random mode.


180

TRACK SCAN－ This featuresamples all tracks/files in theselected folder in the order they arestored. To activate track scan, pressand release the SCAN button. Youwill see TRACK SCAN in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach track/file in the folder.FOLDER-SCAN － This featuresamples the first track/file in eachfolder in the order they are stored.To activate folder scan, press andhold the SCAN button. You will seeFOLDER SCAN in the display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachfirst track/file in the folder(s).Press and release the button to turnoff either scan mode. Pressing eitherSKIP button also turns off thisfeature.

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory DeviceTo play the radio when an USB flashmemory device is playing, press theAM/FM button or touch the FM1,FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2 icon. If adisc is in the audio unit, press theCD/XM button or touch the CD iconto play the disc. If a PC card is in theaudio unit, Press the CD/XM buttonor touch the CARD icon to play a PCcard.Press the CD/XM button again ortouch the AUX icon to switch back tothe USB flash memory device.

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDeviceYou can disconnect the USB flashmemory device at any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Make sure to followthe USB flash memory device'sinstructions when you remove it.When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the audio display (if selected) showsNO DATA.If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessagesIf you see an error message in thescreen, see page 182.


181

Features

If you see an error message on thescreen while playing a USB flashmemory device, find the solution inthe chart to the right. If you cannotclear the error message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.


UNPLAYABLE FILEThe system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flashmemory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.NO SONG There is no music information.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

182

General Information● When using CD-R or CD-RWdiscs, use only high quality CDslabeled for audio use.

● When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

● Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

● Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.


Protecting DiscsWhen a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the recordedsurface of the disc, causing skippingor other problems. Remove thesepieces by rubbing the inner andouter edges with the side of a pencilor pen.Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the disc to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

CONTINUED

Protecting Your Discs

183

Features

Additional Information onRecommended DiscsThe disc player/changer has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated below, it maybecome stuck inside and damage theaudio unit.Examples of these discs are shown tothe right:

1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Sealed With PlasticRing

Chipped/Cracked

WarpedBurrs


184

4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs

● CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

● Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

● Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

● Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

● This audio unit cannot play a Dual-disc®.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Can Shape Arrow Shape

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.


185

Features

Radio FrequenciesThe radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover thesefrequencies:AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHzRadio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio ReceptionHow well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station'stransmitter, nearby large objects, andatmospheric conditions.A radio station's signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station's signal.

Driving very near the transmitter of astation that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio's reception. Youmay temporarily hear both stations,or hear only the station you are closeto.

FM/AM Radio Reception

186

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station's transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

FM/AM Radio Reception

187

Features

On EX and SC modelsYour vehicle's audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code in the presetbuttons (icon on vehicle's withnavigation system). Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from specificdigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.You should have received a radiocode card that lists your audiosystem's code and serial numbers. Itis best to store this card in a safeplace at home. In addition, youshould write the audio system'sserial number in this owner'smanual.If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system'sserial number.

If your vehicle's battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons (icons onvehicles with navigation system) toenter the code. The code is on theradio code card included in yourowner's manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

Radio Theft Protection

188

On vehicles without navigation systemIf your vehicle's battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you mayneed to set the clock.

On LX modelTo set the hour, press the H buttonwhile pressing the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button until the hour advancesto the desired time. Change theminute by pressing the M buttonwhile pressing the CLOCK (SCAN/RPT) button until the minuteadvances to the desired time. You can use the R button to quickly

set the time to the nearest hour.Press the R button while pressing theCLOCK button. If the displayed timeis before the half hour, pressing Rsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is after thehalf hour, pressing R sets the clockforward to the beginning of the nexthour.For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

On EX and SC models

Press and hold the CLOCK buttonuntil the numbers flash and you heara beep. Change the hour by pressingthe H button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minute by pressing the M buttonuntil the numbers advance to thedesired time.

TIME DISPLAY CLOCKBUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTON

M BUTTON

TIME DISPLAYCLOCK BUTTON

H BUTTON R BUTTON

M BUTTON

CONTINUED

Setting the Clock

189

Features

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press the R(RESET) button to set the clock backto the previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, pressing Rsets the clock forward to thebeginning of the next hour.For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00When you are finished, press theCLOCK button again.

On vehicles with navigation systemThe navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

Setting the Clock

190

On EX and SC models

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The middle button adjusts thevolume up ( ) or down ( ). Pressthe top or bottom of the button andhold it until the desired volume isreached, then release it.The MODE button changes themode.On vehicles with navigation systemPressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through allpossible media sources whether theyare present or not.On vehicles without navigation systemPressing the MODE buttonrepeatedly cycles through allpresent, connected media sources.Media sources that are not presentor connected will not appear whencycling with the MODE button.The CH button has two functions,depending on whether you arelistening to the radio, or playing adisc.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press this button, thesystem advances to the next presetstation on the band you are listeningto. You will see the number of theselected Preset button in the display.To change bands, or to change fromFM1 to FM2 or XM1 to XM2, pressthe MODE button.If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the CH button.You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If has text dataor the disc is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

CH BUTTON

MODEBUTTON

VOLUMEBUTTON

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls

191

Features

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the CH button untilyou hear a beep, to skip forward tothe first file of the next folder.On vehicles with navigation systemIf you are playing a PC card, pressthe CH button to advance to the nextfile.If you are playing a USB flashmemory device or iPod with the USBadapter cable (if equipped), pressand release the CH button to skipforward to the beginning of the nextfile.

Auxiliary Input JackOn EX and SC models

Your vehicle has the auxiliary inputjack on the front panel, or in theconsole compartment, depending onmodels. The system will acceptauxiliary input from standard audioaccessories.When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press theCD/AUX button (AUX icon onmodels with navigation system) toselect it.

SC model

EX model

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

192

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Using Cruise Control

1. Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

The cruise control system can be lefton, even when it is not in use.

2. Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

CONTINUED

Cruise Control

193

Features

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will come back on.When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Changing the Set SpeedYou can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:● Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

● To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

● Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:NOTE: If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, use the brakes as younormally would.

● Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

● To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

● Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out. Whenthe vehicle slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/DECELbutton.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Cruise Control

194

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Canceling Cruise Control

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:● Tap the brake or clutch pedal.● Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

● Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Resuming the Set SpeedWhen you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h) then press and release theRES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL indicator will come on.The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Cruise Control

195

Features

On vehicles with navigation system

Whenever you shift to reverse (R)with the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the rear view is shownon the navigation system screen.For the best picture, always keep therearview camera clean, and do notcover the camera lens. To avoidscratching the lens when you cleanit, use a moist, soft cloth.

When in reverse, the touch screenand navigation system ‘‘hard’’buttons are locked out, except the‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ button allows you to adjustthe brightness of the rearviewcamera image.

The camera brightness cannot beadjusted by voice control.

Since the rearview camera displayarea is limited, you should alwaysback up slowly and carefully, andlook behind you for obstacles.

Rearview Camera and Monitor

196

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

Break-in Period ........................... 198Fuel Recommendation ................ 198Service Station Procedures ......... 199Refueling................................. 199Opening and Closing the

Hood................................... 200Oil Check................................ 201Engine Coolant Check ............ 201

Fuel Economy............................. 202Accessories and

Modifications .......................... 205Carrying Cargo ........................... 207

Before Driving

197

Before

Driving

Break-in PeriodHelp assure your vehicle's futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:● Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

● Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

● Avoid hard braking for the first 200miles (300 km).

● Do not tow a trailer.You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Fuel RecommendationYour vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to enginedamage.On vehicles with manual transmissionYou may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.We recommend using qualitygasoline containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

198

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.For further important fuel-relatedinformation for your vehicle, orinformation on gasoline that does notcontain MMT, visit Owner Link atowners.honda.com. In Canada, visitwww.honda.ca for additionalinformation on gasoline.

Refueling1. Park with the driver's side closest to

the service station pump.

2. Outside of the vehicle, open the fuelfill door by pulling its notched edge.

Gasoline is highly flammable andexplosive. You can be burned orseriously injured when handlingfuel.● Stop the engine and keep heat,sparks, and flame away.

● Handle fuel only outdoors.● Wipe up spills immediately.

3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. Youmay hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Thisleaves some room in the fuel tank forthe fuel to expand with temperaturechanges.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offeven though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle's fuel vapor recovery system.The system helps keep fuel vaporfrom going into the atmosphere. Tryfilling at another pump. If this doesnot fix the problem, consult yourdealer.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on until itclicks at least once. If you do notproperly tighten the cap, themalfunction indicator lamp maycome on (see page 296). You willalso see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message on the information display.

6. Close the fuel fill door.

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

199

Before

Driving

Opening and Closing the Hood

1. Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

2. Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.The hood latch handle is above the‘‘H’’ logo. Push this handle up torelease it. Lift up the hood.If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

3. Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into thedesignated hole in the hood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

SUPPORT ROD

CLIP

Service Station Procedures

200

Oil Check

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.1. Remove the dipstick (orange tab).2. Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3. Insert it all the way back in itstube.

4. Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see Adding Engine Oil on page 251.

Engine Coolant Check

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see AddingEngine Coolant on page 254 forinformation on adding the propercoolant.Refer to Owner's MaintenanceChecks on page 248 for informationabout checking other items on yourvehicle.

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MIN

MAX RESERVE TANK

Service Station Procedures

201

Before

Driving

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the right area useful tool for comparison whenbuying a vehicle. EPA estimatesinclude:City MPG － Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.Highway MPG － Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallonachieved is also provided.

Combined Fuel Economy －Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost －Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit www.fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visitwww.vehicles.gc.ca)

City MPG

Combined FuelEconomy

Highway MPG

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Fuel Economy

202

Fuel Economy FactorsThe following factors can lower yourvehicle's fuel economy:● Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)

● Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go traffic

● Cold engine operation (engines aremore efficient when warmed up)

● Driving with a heavy load or the airconditioner running

● Improperly inflated tires

Improving Fuel EconomyVehicle MaintenanceA properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see Owner'sMaintenance Checks on page 248).For example:

● Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertification Seal (see page 251).

● Maintain proper tire inflation －An underinflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

● Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle － It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

● Keep your vehicle clean － Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle's undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

Drive Efficiently● Drive moderately－ Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering, andhard braking increase fuelconsumption.

● Observe the speed limit －Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel economy at speeds above45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

● Always drive in the highest gearpossible－ If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

● Avoid excessive idling－ Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon (0 kmsper liter).

CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

203

Before

Driving

● Minimize the use of the airconditioning system－ The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

● Plan and combine trips －Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Calculating Fuel EconomyMeasuring TechniquesDirect calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

Checking Your Fuel Economy

1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.2) Reset trip counter to zero.3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.

100 Liter Kilometers L per100 km

Milesdriven

Gallonsof fuel

Miles perGallon

Fuel Economy

204

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.AccessoriesYour dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories have beendesigned and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, and couldadversely affect your vehicle'shandling and stability.

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle's handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle'scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system.

Before installing any accessory:● Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

● Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits (seepage 298) or interfere with theproper operation of your vehicle.

● Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

● Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

CONTINUED

Accessories and Modifications

205

Before

Driving

Modifying Your VehicleRemoving parts from your vehicle, orreplacing components with somenon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle'shandling, stability, and reliability.Some examples are:● Lowering the vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

● Raising your vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

● Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents, and are notcompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

● Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle's anti-lock brakes andother systems.

● Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle'ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Accessories and Modifications

206

ꭧ: If equipped

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:● Cargo area side pockets● Glove box● Overhead console (EX and SCmodels)

● Door pockets● Seat-back pockets (EX and SCmodels)

● Cargo area (including rear seatswhen they are folded down, foldedto the side, or removed)

● Seat-back bungees (EX model)● Roof-rack (if installed)● Center console (SC model)● Cooler box (EX model)

CARGO AREA

CENTER CONSOLEꭧ

COOLER BOXꭧ

SEAT-BACK POCKETSꭧ GLOVE BOX

CARGO AREA SIDE POCKET DOOR POCKETS OVERHEAD CONSOLEꭧ

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

207

Before

Driving

However, carrying too much cargo, orimproperly storing it, can affect yourvehicle's handling, stability, stoppingdistance, tires, and make it unsafe.Before carrying any type of cargo, besure to read the following pages.

Load LimitsThe maximum load for your vehicleis 670 lbs (305 kg).See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver'sdoorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit－1. Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

Carrying Cargo

208

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400－ 750 (5╳ 150)＝ 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo,and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on thedriver's doorjamb.

Max Load (675 lbs) Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Cargo Weight(375 lbs)





CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

209

Before

Driving

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment● Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

● Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals, the seat operation, orthe proper operation of the sensorsunder the seats.

● Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

● If you fold the rear seats down orup, or remove them, tie downitems that could be thrown aboutthe vehicle during a crash orsudden stop. Also, keep all cargobelow the bottom of the windows.If it is higher, it could interferewith the proper operation of theside curtain airbags.

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Rack● Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

● If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate or the hatch, exhaust gascan enter the passenger area. Toavoid the possibility of carbonmonoxide poisoning, follow theinstructions on page 52.

● If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 75 lbs (34 kg).If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Carrying Cargo

210

Optional Cargo NetThe cargo net can be used to helphold down light items in the cargoarea. The cargo net may not preventheavy items from being thrownforward in a crash or a sudden stop.Heavy items should be secured tothe cargo area floor with the hooksor cinch straps attached to the cargohooks.

Seat-Back BungeeOn EX model

The driver's seat-back and left rearseat-back are equipped withadjustable bungee cords to holdmedium-sized, lightweight objects.

If the cords are not installed, routeone cord through the loops asshown. To attach the hooks, pressthe top of the hook down, and slideto the desired position, then release.Adjust as needed.

ADJUSTABLE BUNGEE CORD

LOOP

HOOK

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

211

Before

Driving

Cargo Hooks

The four hooks on the side panelscan be used to install a net forsecuring items. Each hook isdesigned to hold up to 50 lbs (23 kg)of weight.

Your vehicle also has a grocery hookon each side panel in the cargo area.They are designed to hold lightitems. Heavy objects may damagethe hook. Make sure any items puton each hook weigh less than 6.5 lbs(3 kg).

CARGO HOOKS

GROCERY HOOKS

Carrying Cargo

212

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes important informationon parking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assist(VSA®) system, the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer or drive off-highway.

Driving Guidelines...................... 214Preparing to Drive ...................... 215Starting the Engine ..................... 216Manual Transmission ................. 217Automatic Transmission ............. 219Parking ....................................... 223Braking System .......................... 224Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............... 225Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)................................... 227Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),

aka Electronic Stability Control(ESC), System..................... 230

Towing a Trailer.......................... 232Off-Highway Driving

Guidelines............................... 238

Driving

213

Driving

Your vehicle has a higher groundclearance that allows you to travelover bumps, obstacles, and roughterrain. It also provides goodvisibility so you can anticipateproblems earlier.Because your vehicle rides higher offthe ground, it has a high center ofgravity that can cause it to roll over ifyou make abrupt turns. Utilityvehicles have a significantly higherroll over rate than other types ofvehicles.To prevent rollovers or loss ofcontrol:● Take corners at slower speedsthan you would with a passengervehicle.

● Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers whenever possible.

● Do not modify your vehicle in anyway that would raise the center ofgravity.

● Do not carry heavy cargo on theroof.

Four-wheel drive modelsYour vehicle is equipped with a four-wheel drive (4WD) system. Whenthe system senses a loss of front-wheel traction, it automaticallytransfers some power to the rearwheels. This gives you better tractionand mobility.You still need to exercise the samecare when accelerating, steering, andbraking that you would in a two-wheel drive vehicle.

See page 238 for off-highway drivingguidelines.

Driving Guidelines

214

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

2. Check that the hood is fullyclosed.

3. Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

4. Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

5. Check the seat adjustment (seepage 83).

6. Check the adjustment of the insideand outside mirrors (see page 93).

7. Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page 74).

8. Make sure the doors, the hatch,and the tailgate are securelyclosed and locked.

9. Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page 14).

10. When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page 57).

Preparing to Drive

215

Driving

1. Apply the parking brake.2. In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reduce thedrain on the battery.

3. Manual transmission:Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.Automatic transmission:Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

4. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III) positionfor more than 15 seconds at a time.If the engine does not start rightaway, pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle from theft. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used, theengine's fuel system is disabled. Formore information, see page 76.

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air found ataltitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

Starting the Engine

216

U.S. models Only

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse. When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause the clutch to wear outfaster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won't‘‘grind.’’When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting, makesure the engine speed will not gointo the tachometer's red zone in thelower gear.

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission

217

Driving

Recommended Shift PointsDrive in the highest gear that lets theengine run and accelerate smoothly.This will give you good fuel economyand effective emissions control. Thefollowing shift points arerecommended:

Shift up Normal acceleration

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)48 mph (77 km/h)

Engine Speed LimiterIf you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into thetachometer's red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine's computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.The engine speed limiter only workswhen you upshift; engine speed isnot limited during downshifts. Beforedownshifting, make sure the enginewill not go into the tachometer's redzone.

Manual Transmission

218

Shift Lever Position Indicators

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission. Avoidrapid acceleration, and have thetransmission checked by your dealeras soon as possible.

Shifting

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal, push therelease button, and pull the levertoward you. You cannot shift out ofPark when the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)position.

To shift from: Do this:

P to RPress the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

R to PPress the shift lever releasebutton.

N to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

Move the shift lever.2 to DD to NN to DR to ND3 to D

Press the D3 button.D to D3

Park (P) － This positionmechanically locks the transmission.Use Park whenever you are turningoff or starting the engine. To shift outof Park, you must press on the brakepedal and press the release button onthe shift lever. Make sure your foot isoff the accelerator pedal.

RELEASE BUTTON

D3 BUTTON SHIFT LEVER

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

219

Driving

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release onpage 221.To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.Reverse (R) － Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to reverse. To shiftfrom reverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift.

Neutral (N)－ Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly with theengine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Drive (D)－ Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.Drive (D3)－ To use D3, press theD3 button when the shift lever is inthe ‘‘D’’ position. This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected instead of allfive. Use D3 when towing a trailer inhilly terrain, or to provide enginebraking when going down a steephill. D3 can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.


220

Second (2) － This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gear whenyou come to a stop.Use second gear:● For more power when climbing.● To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

● For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

● To help reduce wheel spin.● When driving downhill with atrailer.

First (1)－ This position locks thetransmission in first gear. Byupshifting and downshifting through1, 2, D3, and D, you can operate thetransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.Engine Speed LimiterIf you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into thetachometer's red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine's computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.

Shift Lock ReleaseThis allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the release buttondoes not work.1. Set the parking brake.2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

CONTINUED


221

Driving

3. Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover next to theshift lever. Using a flat-tipscrewdriver, carefully pry on theedge of the cover to remove it.

4. Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

5. Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

6. Remove the key from the shift lockrelease slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the right side. Pressthe brake pedal, and restart theengine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

COVER

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT


222

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly, or yourvehicle may roll if it is parked on anincline.If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Parking Tips● Make sure the windows areclosed.

● Turn off the lights.● Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take them withyou.

● Lock the doors and the hatch withthe key.

● Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

● If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

● If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reversegear.

● Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Parking

223

Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The emergencybrake assist system increases thestopping force when you depress thebrake pedal hard in an emergencysituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, reduces their effectiveness andreduces brake pad life. In addition,fuel economy can be reduced. It alsokeeps your brake lights on all thetime, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces theireffectiveness. Use the engine toassist the brakes by taking your footoff the accelerator and downshiftingto a lower gear.Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.

Braking System DesignThe hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Braking System

224

Brake Pad Wear IndicatorsIf the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You should never pump the brake pedal.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

CONTINUED

Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

225

Driving

ABS Indicator

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page 297.If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage 297. If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle. It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly, such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability. Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

226

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.Each tire has its own pressure sensor(not including the spare tire). If theair pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressure indicatorto come on.

Low Tire PressureIndicator

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle's tire information placard.If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver's doorjamb.If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressureis too low to continue driving, replacethe tire with the compact spare tire(see page 282).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.Driving on a significantlyunderinflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle's handling andstopping ability.Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

227

Driving

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.Refer to page 271 for tire inflationguidelines.Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified in the vehicleplacard and this owner's manual (seepage 310).

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Changing a Tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with the compactspare tire (see page 282).Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.After you replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.


228

The low tire pressure indicator or theTPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitorsensor.Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.





229

Driving

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine's output and byselectively applying the brakes.When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. You will also seethe VSA system indicator blink.The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle's driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle's entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

VSA OFF Indicator

When VSA is off, the VSA OFFindicator comes on as a reminder.

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA system indicator blink.If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.NOTE: The main function of the VSAsystem is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

230

VSA OFF SwitchIn certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

This switch is under the driver's sidevent. To turn the VSA system on andoff, press and hold it until you hear abeep.When VSA is off, the VSA OFFindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.VSA is turned on every time you startthe engine, even if you turned it offthe last time you drove the vehicle.

VSA and Tire SizesDriving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage 275).If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

VSA OFF SWITCH

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

231

Driving

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it to towa trailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.Break-In PeriodAvoid towing a trailer during yourvehicle's first 600 miles (1,000 km)(see page 198).Be sure to read the Off-HighwayDriving Guidelines section on page238 if you plan to tow off pavedsurfaces.

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: The maximumallowable weight of the trailer andeverything in or on it must notexceed 1,500 lbs (680 kg). Towing atrailer that is too heavy can seriouslyaffect your vehicle's handling andperformance. It can also damage theengine and drivetrain.

Towing a Trailer

232

Tongue Load: The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10% of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make the trailerunstable and cause it to sway.

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60% of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and 40%toward the rear, then re-adjust theload as needed.● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:4,450 lbs (2,020 kg)

● Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle axles is:2,300 lbs (1,045 kg)on the front axle2,205 lbs (1,000 kg)on the rear axle

Checking LoadsThe best way to confirm that all loadsare within limits is to check them at apublic scale. For public scales in yourarea, check your local phone book,or contact your trailer dealer orrental agency for assistance.If you cannot get to a public scale,you can estimate the total trailerweight by adding the weight of yourtrailer (as quoted by themanufacturer) with everything in oron the trailer.If you normally pull the same loadeach time you tow a trailer, you canuse a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge to check thetongue load the first time you set upa towing combination (a fully loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

233

Driving

Towing Equipment andAccessoriesTowing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure thehighest quality equipment, purchaseHonda equipment wheneverpossible.Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, provincial, territorialand local regulations.

HitchesAny hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.Safety ChainsAlways use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if it becomesunhitched. Leave enough slack toallow the trailer to turn cornerseasily, but do not let the chains dragon the ground.

Trailer BrakesHonda recommends that any trailerwith a total weight of 1,000 lbs (450kg) or more has its own brake.There are two common types oftrailer brakes; surge and electric.Surge brakes are common for boattrailers, since the brakes will get wet.If you choose electric brakes, be surethey are electronically actuated. Donot attempt to tap into your vehicle'shydraulic system. No matter howsuccessful it may seem, any attemptto attach trailer brakes to yourvehicle's hydraulic system will lowerbraking effectiveness and create apotential hazard.See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Towing a Trailer

234

Trailer LightsTrailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, provincial,territorial, and local regulations.Check with your local trailer dealeror rental agency for the requirementsin the area where you plan to tow,and use only equipment designed foryour vehicle.Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle's electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Additional Towing EquipmentMany states, Canadian provinces andterritories require special outsidemirrors when towing a trailer. Even ifthey don't, you should install specialmirrors if you cannot clearly seebehind you, or if the trailer creates ablind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

235

Driving

Pre-Tow ChecklistWhen preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:● The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

● The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

● All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages 232 and 233).

● The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

● All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

● Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page 271),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

Driving Safely With a TrailerThe added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle's handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.Towing Speeds and GearsDrive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use the D positionwhen towing a trailer on level roads.D3 is the proper shift lever positionto use when towing a trailer in hillyterrain. (See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ on thenext page for additional gearinformation.)

Towing a Trailer

236

Making Turns and BrakingMake turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.Driving on HillsWhen climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of the roadto let the engine cool.If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D3.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle in placeby pressing on the accelerator, asthis can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.Handling Crosswinds and BuffetingCrosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Backing UpAlways drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backingup. Grip the bottom of the steeringwheel, then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.ParkingFollow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer's tires.Towing Your VehicleYour vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page 303.

Towing a Trailer

237

Driving

General InformationYour vehicle has been designedprimarily for use on pavement. Butits higher ground clearance allowsyou to occasionally travel on unpavedroads, such as campgrounds, picnicsites, and similar locations. It is notdesigned for trail-blazing, mountainclimbing, or other challenging off-road activities.If you decide to drive on unpavedroads, you will find that it requiressomewhat different driving skills.Your vehicle will also handlesomewhat differently than it does onpavement. So be sure to read thisowner's manual, pay special attentionto the precautions and tips in thissection, and get acquainted with yourvehicle before you leave thepavement.

Improperly operating thisvehicle on or off pavement cancause a crash or rollover inwhich you and your passengerscould be seriously injured orkilled.● Follow all instructions andguidelines in this owner'smanual.

● Keep your speed low, anddon't drive faster thanconditions permit.

Important Safety PrecautionsTo avoid loss of control or rollover,be sure to follow all precautions andrecommendations.● Be sure to store cargo properly,and do not exceed your vehiclecargo load limits (see pages 208and 232).

● Wherever you drive, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear seat belts.

● Keep your speed low, and never gofaster than the conditions allow.

● It's up to you to continually assessthe situation and drive within thelimits.

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

238

Check Out Your VehicleBefore you leave the pavement, besure to do all scheduled maintenanceand service, and inspect your vehiclefor any problems. Pay specialattention to the condition of the tires,and check the tire pressures.After you return to the pavement,carefully inspect your vehicle tomake sure there is no damage thatcould make driving it unsafe.Recheck the condition of the tiresand the tire pressures.RememberThe route presents limits (too steepor bumpy roads). You have limits(driving skill and comfort). And yourvehicle has limits (traction, stability,and power).Driving off-highway can behazardous if you fail to recognizelimits and take the properprecautions.

Accelerating and BrakingFor better traction on all surfaces,accelerate slowly and gradually buildup speed. If you try to start too faston wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, youmight not have enough traction toget underway, and you may digyourself a hole. Starting with the shiftlever in second (2) gear will help youhave a smoother start on snow or ice.Keep in mind that you will usuallyneed more time and distance tobrake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’the brakes; let the anti-lock brakingsystem pump them for you.

Avoiding ObstaclesDebris on the road can damage yoursuspension or other components.Because your vehicle has a highcenter of gravity, driving over a largeobstacle, or allowing a wheel to dropinto a deep hole can cause yourvehicle to tip or roll over.Driving on SlopesIf you can't clearly see all conditionsor obstacles on a slope, walk theslope before you drive on it. If youhave any doubt whether or not youcan safely drive on the slope, don'tdo it. Find another route.If you are driving up a hill and findthat you cannot continue, do not try toturn around. Your vehicle could rollover. Slowly back down the hill,following the same route you took upthe hill.

CONTINUED


239

Driving

Crossing a StreamAvoid driving through deep water. Ifyou encounter water in your route (asmall stream or large puddle, forexample), evaluate it carefully beforegoing ahead. Make sure it is shallow,flowing slowly, and has firm groundunderneath. If you are not sure of thedepth or the ground, turn around andfind another route.Driving through deep water can alsodamage your vehicle. The water canget into the transmission anddifferential, diluting the lubricant andcausing an eventual failure. It canalso wash the grease out of the wheelbearings.

If You Get StuckAvoid driving on soft sand, deepmud, or other surfaces where youcould get stuck. If you do happen toget stuck because of inclementweather or other conditions, choosea safe and appropriate course ofaction.You should never use a jack to trygetting unstuck. A jack only workson firm, level ground. Also, yourvehicle could easily slip off the jackand hurt you or someone else.

4-Wheel Drive VehiclesIf you spin the wheels excessivelytrying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat the components of the 4-wheel drive system. If this happens,the 4-wheel drive system shuts offand only the front wheels receivepower. At this point, you must stopand allow everything to cool down.The 4-wheel drive system will workagain after its temperature drops.If you slip the clutch for a long timewhile trying to get unstuck, you mayoverheat and damage it.


240

This section explains why it is importantto keep your vehicle well maintained andhow to follow basic maintenance safetyprecautions.This section also includes instructionson how to read the maintenance mindermessages on the information display,and instructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may want topurchase the service manual. See page325 for information on how to obtain acopy, or see your dealer.

U.S. Vehicles:Maintenance, replacement, or repairof emissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishment orindividual using parts that are‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.

Maintenance Safety..................... 242Maintenance Minder .................. 243Fluid Locations ........................... 250Adding Engine Oil ...................... 251Changing the Engine Oil and

Filter ....................................... 252Engine Coolant ........................... 254Windshield Washers................... 255Transmission Fluid ..................... 256Automatic Transmission

Fluid ................................... 256Manual Transmission Fluid .... 257

Rear Differential Fluid................. 258Brake and Clutch Fluid ............... 258Power Steering Fluid .................. 260Cleaning the Body Panels ........... 260Lights.......................................... 261Cleaning the Seat Belts ............... 268Floor Mats .................................. 268Dust and Pollen Filter ................. 269Wiper Blades .............................. 269Wheels........................................ 271Tires ........................................... 271Checking the Battery .................. 277

Vehicle Storage........................... 278

Maintenance

241

Maintenance

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.Important Safety PrecautionsTo eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.● Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

● To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

● To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

● Wear eye protection and protectiveclothing when working with thebattery or compressed air.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner'smanual.

Potential Vehicle Hazards● Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust. Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

● Burns from hot parts. Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

● Injury from moving parts. Do notrun the engine unless instructed todo so.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you to beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner'smanual.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not you shouldperform a given task.

Maintenance Safety

242

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerdo engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

Engine Oil Life Display

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then press and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears.

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100% － 91% 100%90% － 81% 90%80% － 71% 80%70% － 61% 70%60% － 51% 60%50% － 41% 50%40% － 31% 40%30% － 21% 30%20% － 16% 20%15% － 11% 15%10% － 6% 10%5% － 1% 5%

0% 0%

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

SELECT/RESET KNOB


CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

243

Maintenance

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayedabove the ‘‘OIL LIFE’’ message.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicator reminds you that the time iscoming soon to take your vehicle infor the required maintenance.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR


Maintenance Minder

244

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page 246).You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on every timeyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, then it goes out ifyou switch the information display.When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenance performedby your dealer as soon as possible.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator ( )also comes on and remains on in theinstrument panel. When you see thismessage, immediately have theindicated maintenance done by yourdealer.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative distancetraveled is displayed and begins toblink after the vehicle has beendriven 10 miles (10 km) or more.Negative distance traveled meansyour vehicle has passed themaintenance required point.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

NEGATIVE DISTANCE TRAVELED


CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

245

Maintenance

To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer or the trip meter, press andrelease the select/reset knob.When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative distance traveled, themaintenance minder indicator ( )remains on even if you change theinformation display.Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described as follows.

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page 249.

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplayYour dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

2. Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

Maintenance Minder

246

3. Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

4. Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

Important MaintenancePrecautionsIf you have the required service donebut do not reset the display, or resetthe display without doing the service,the system will not show the propermaintenance intervals. This can leadto serious mechanical problemsbecause you will no longer have anaccurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.Your authorized Honda dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.


CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

247

Maintenance

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warranties ineffect. Maintenance may be done byany qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith＃ will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the informationdisplay.Owner's Maintenance ChecksYou should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. If youare unsure of how to perform anycheck, turn to the appropriate pagelisted.● Engine oil level－ Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. See page201.

● Engine coolant level－ Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page 201.

● Automatic transmission － Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page256.

● Brakes－ Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page 258.

● Tires－ Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page271.

● Lights－ Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page 261.

Maintenance Minder

248

Symbol Maintenance Main Items

A ● Replace engine oilꭧ1

B ● Replace engine oilꭧ1 and oil filter

● Inspect front and rear brakes

● Check parking brake adjustment

● Inspect these items:

● Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

● Suspension components

● Driveshaft boots

● Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)

● All fluid levels and condition of fluids

● Exhaust system＃

● Fuel lines and connections＃

ꭧ1: If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the

display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 248.

NOTE: ● Independent of the maintenance message in the information display,

replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

● Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

● Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

1 ● Rotate tires

2 ● Replace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace

every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

● Replace dust and pollen filter

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high

concentrations of soot in the air from industry and

from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every

15,000 miles (24,000 km).

● Inspect drive belt

3 ● Replace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle

speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission

and transfer temperatures. This requires transmission

and transfer fluid changes more frequently than

recommended by the maintenance minder. If you

regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,

have the transmission and transfer fluid changed at

60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles

(48,000 km) (For A/T only).

4 ● Replace spark plugs

● Inspect valve clearance

5 ● Replace engine coolant

6 ● Replace rear differential fluid (4WDmodel only)

Maintenance MinderMaintenance

Minder

249

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OILDIPSTICK(Orange tab)

POWERSTEERING FLUID(Red cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

CLUTCH FLUID(Manualtransmission only)(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

Fluid Locations

250

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover. Pourin the oil slowly and carefully so youdo not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Recommended Engine OilOil is a major contributor to yourengine's performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute's latest requirements.

Honda motor oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container's label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Oil

251

Maintenance

Synthetic OilYou may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil, itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the maintenanceminder display.Engine Oil AdditivesYour vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Changing the Engine Oil andFilterAlways change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledtechnician.

1. Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

2. Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

OIL DRAIN BOLT

WASHER

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

252

3. Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

4. Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirt anddust on the connecting surface of anew oil filter.

5. Put a new washer on the drainbolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:33 lbf·ft (45 N·m, 4.5 kgf·m)

6. Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. Startthe engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

8. Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

9. Turn off the engine and let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

OIL FILTER

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

253

Maintenance

Adding Engine Coolant

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAXline. Inspect the cooling system forleaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent distilledwater. Never add straight antifreezeor plain water.If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminumengines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

RESERVE TANK

Engine Coolant

254

1. Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

2. Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

3. Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

4. The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

5. Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it fully.

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle'scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Windshield Washers

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.On U.S. models: Check the reservoir'sfluid level by removing the cap andlooking at the level gauge attached tothe cap.

RADIATOR CAP

LEVEL GAUGE

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

255

Maintenance

On Canadian models: The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page 61).Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

Do not use engine antifreeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antifreezecan damage your vehicle's paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher fluid.

Automatic Transmission FluidCheck the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.1. Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and check thefluid level. It should be betweenthe upper and lower marks.

DIPSTICK

UPPERMARKLOWERMARK

Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid

256

5. If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Always use Honda GenuineATF-Z1 (automatic transmissionfluid).

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Do notmix with other transmission fluids.Using transmission fluid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting from the use oftransmission fluid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

6. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page243).If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Manual Transmission Fluid

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle on levelground. Remove the transmissionfiller bolt, and carefully feel insidethe bolt hole with your finger. Thefluid level should be up to the edgeof the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole.

WASHER FILLER BOLT

Correct Level

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

257

Maintenance

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification Seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace as soonas it is convenient.The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the maintenance minder (see page243).If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Rear Differential Fluid4WD models onlyThe rear differential should bedrained and refilled with new fluidaccording to the time and distancerecommendations shown on themaintenance minder display. Haveyour dealer replace the reardifferential fluid.Use Honda Dual Pump Fluid II only.Do not use automatic transmissionfluid (ATF).

Brake and Clutch FluidCheck the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.There are up to two reservoirs,depending on the model. They are:● Brake fluid reservoir (all models)● Clutch fluid reservoir (manualtransmission only)

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Transmission Fluid, Rear Differential Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

258

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT3 as soon as possible.Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle'sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake Fluid

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Clutch FluidOn vehicles with manual transmission

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for the brakesystem.A low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Brake and Clutch Fluid

259

Maintenance

Power Steering Fluid

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Turning the steering wheel to full left orright lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Cleaning the Body PanelsIf equipped with body panelsTo clean the gray composite bodypanels, wash them with soap andwater only. Do not apply wax to thepanels; it will cause discoloration.

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Power Steering Fluid, Cleaning the Body Panels

260

Headlight AimingThe headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustments should be done by yourdealer or another qualifiedtechnician.

Replacing a Headlight BulbYour vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. Handle it by its steel base andprotect the glass from contact withyour skin or hard objects. If youtouch the glass, clean it withdenatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

1. Open the hood.If you need to change theheadlight bulb on the driver's side,remove the front end of the airintake duct by pulling it out.

AIR INTAKE DUCT

CONTINUED

Lights

261

Maintenance

2. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

3. Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

4. Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot the wireout of the way, then remove thebulb.

5. Install the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

6. Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure one of the three arrowson the rubber seal is facing up; it ismarked ‘‘ ’’.

7. Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb.

8. (Driver's side)Install the front end of the airintake duct.

Replacing a Daytime RunningLight Bulb

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

TAB

Lights

262

4. Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

5. Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

6. Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Replacing a Front Parking/TurnSignal Light Bulb

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing the bulb in and turningit counterclockwise until itunlocks.

4. Install the new bulb in the socketby pushing the bulb in and turningit clockwise until it locks.


CONTINUED

Lights

263

Maintenance

Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb

1. If you are changing the bulb on thedriver's side, start the engine, turnthe steering wheel all the way tothe left, and turn off the engine. Ifyou are changing the bulb on thepassenger's side, turn the steeringwheel to the right.

2. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the three holding screws,and remove the wheel archprotector from the inner fender.

3. Use a flat-tip screwdriver toremove the holding clip from theinner fender.

4. Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender.

5. Remove the socket from the turnsignal assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

6. Pull the burned out bulb straightout of its socket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

7. Insert the socket back into theturn signal assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

8. Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

WHEEL ARCH PROTECTOR

SCREWS

CLIP

Lights

264

9. Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clip.Lock the clip in place by pushingon the center.Install the wheel arch protectorand tighten the screws securely.

Replacing a Front Side MarkerLight Bulb

1. Open the hood.To change the driver's side,remove the front end of the airintake duct by pulling it out (seepage 261).

2. Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

4. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


6. Install the front end of the airintake duct.

CONTINUED

Lights

265

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs

1. Open the hatch and the tailgate.Remove the two mounting screwswith a Phillips-head screwdriver,and remove the taillight assemblyfrom the body by pulling it back.

2. Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: brake/taillight, turnsignal light, side marker light, orback-up light.

3. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


5. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.


7. When reinstalling the taillightassembly, first place the two pinsin the holes in place. Tighten thetwo mounting screws.

SCREW

SCREW

TAILLIGHT ASSEMBLY

SOCKET SOCKET

SOCKETSOCKET

Lights

266

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

1. Remove the license light assemblyby pushing the left edge of thelens toward the right and pullingthe assembly out.

2. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

3. Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

4. Put the lens back on the socketuntil it locks.

5. Slide the right side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe left side to latch the assemblyinto place.

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

1. Open the hatch. Remove the lightassembly cover by pushing in onthe tabs on both sides and pullingthe cover down.

2. Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.

LENS

SOCKET

BULB

LENS

TABS

COVER

CONTINUED

Lights

267

Maintenance


4. Press the brake pedal to makesure the new bulb is working.

5. Put the socket back into the lightassembly, and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

6. Put the cover back onto the lightassembly. Push it on until it locksin place.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Floor MatsIf equipped

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps the floor matsfrom sliding forward, possiblyinterfering with the pedals, orbackwards, making the frontpassenger's weight sensorsineffective.

BULB

SOCKET

LOOP

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

268

If you remove the driver's floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Dust and Pollen FilterThis filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles(24,000 km) if you drive primarily inurban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air, or ifthe flow from the heating and coolingsystem becomes less than usual.

Wiper BladesCheck the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.1. Front:Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the arms.

Rear:Raise the wiper arm off the hatchglass and hold it.

CONTINUED

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

269

Maintenance

2. Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.If you are changing the rear wiperblade, go to step 6.

3. Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull up firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

4. Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them in theslots along the edge of the newblade.

5. Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

6. Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield or the hatch glass.

LOCK TAB

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Wiper Blades

270

WheelsClean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.If equippedAluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

TiresTo safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Inflation GuidelinesKeeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.● Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

● Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page 227 formore information on the TPMS.

CONTINUED

Wheels, Tires

271

Maintenance

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least 3 hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm2) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Recommended Tire PressuresThe following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.On all models except SC

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

P215/70R16 99S

Front:33 psi (230 kPa,2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear:35 psi (240 kPa,2.4 kgf/cm2)

On SC modelTire Size Cold Tire Pressure

for Normal Driving

P225/55R18 97HFront/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa,2.2 kgf/cm2)

Tires

272

The compact spare tire pressure is:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver's doorjamb.For additional technical informationabout your tires, see page 311.Tire InspectionEvery time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:● Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

● Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side ofthe tire. Replace the tire if you cansee fabric or cord.

● Excessive tread wear.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Tire Service LifeThe service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See TireLabeling on page 313).

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

CONTINUED

Tires

273

Maintenance

Tire MaintenanceIn addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle's aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights forbalancing.

Tire Rotation

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display.Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Replacing Tires and WheelsReplace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire's sidewall).Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the ABS or VSA system toactivate.

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Tires

274

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle's handling.If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel's specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, the tirepressure monitoring system will notwork.Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner's manual.

Wheel and Tire SpecificationsWheels:(On all models except SC)16 x 6 1/2JJ

(On SC model)18 x 7JJ

Tires:(On all models except SC)P215/70R16 99S

(On SC model)P225/55R18 97H

See page 311 for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page 313for tire size and labeling information.Winter DrivingTires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.Snow TiresIf you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The traction providedby snow tires on dry roads may belower than your original tires. Checkwith the tire dealer for maximumspeed recommendations.

CONTINUED

Tires

275

Maintenance

Tire ChainsMount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.On all models except SCBecause your vehicle has limited tireclearance, use only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners, on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

Traction devices that are the wrong sizeor improperly installed can damageyour vehicle's brake lines, suspension,body, and wheels. Stop driving if theyare hitting any part of the vehicle.

On SC modelBecause your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).Cable-type: SCC Super Z6 SZ 139

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer's instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Tires

276

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the test indicatorwindow. The label on the batteryexplains the test indicator's colors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). To removeit, cover the terminals with a solution ofbaking soda and water. It will bubbleup and turn brown. When this stops,wash it off with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease to helpprevent future corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.Wash your hands after handling.If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle'selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative (－) cable first, andreconnect it last.If your vehicle's battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting may be lost. To reset thetime, see page 189.

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurtyou.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

On EX and SC modelsIf your vehicle's battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem may disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio, you willsee ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page188).

NEGATIVE TERMINAL

TEST INDICATORWINDOW

POSITIVE TERMINAL

CONTINUED

Checking the Battery

277

Maintenance

On vehicles with navigation systemThe navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PIN beforeit can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

Vehicle StorageIf you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.● Fill the fuel tank.● Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

● Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

● Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

● Block the rear wheels.● If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

● Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

● Disconnect the battery.● Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

● To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Checking the Battery, Vehicle Storage

278

● Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made froma porous material such as cotton.Non-porous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

● If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (the coolingfans cycle on and off twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Vehicle Storage

279

Maintenance

280

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again. Ifnot, you will also find instructions ongetting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire .................... 282Changing a Flat Tire ................... 283If the Engine Won't Start............. 289Jump Starting.............................. 291If the Engine Overheats .............. 293Low Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 295Charging System Indicator ......... 295Malfunction Indicator Lamp........ 296Brake System Indicator............... 297Fuses .......................................... 298Fuse Locations............................ 301Emergency Towing..................... 303

Taking Care of the Unexpected

281

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired orreplaced, and put it back on yourvehicle as soon as you can.Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Follow these precautions:● Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).● This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

● Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

● Do not use your compact spare tireon another vehicle unless it is thesame make and model.

● The low tire pressure indicatorcomes on and stays on after youreplace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire. After severalmiles (kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

Compact Spare Tire

282

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire. 3. Open the hatch and the tailgate.

4. The spare tire, jack, and tools areunder the cargo area floor.

TOOLS

SPARE TIRE

JACK

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

283

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

5. Push the rear edge of the handleto raise the handle loop and pull upthe loop to raise the cargo areafloor.

6. Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of the cargo area.

7. Remove the tools and the jack. Toremove the jack, turn the jack'send bracket counterclockwise toloosen it.

8. Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel nut wrench.

JACK WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH


284

9. Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

10. Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

11. Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

JACKING POINTS

EXTENSION

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

CONTINUED


285

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

On LX modelDo not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

12. Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

13. Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly against thehub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL NUTS

WHEEL COVERBRAKE HUB


286

14. Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:80 lbf·ft (108 N·m, 11 kgf·m)

16. Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack's end bracket to lock it inplace. Store the tools.

17. Remove the center cap (ifequipped) from the flat tire, andstore it in the spare tire well.

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

18. Remove the wing bolt on the sparetire mount, and pivot the arm 90°to the upright position. Thentighten the wing bolt securely.

ARM

WING BOLT

CONTINUED


287

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

19. Remove the small round plug fromthe cargo area floor by pushing itfrom the back side to make a hole.Store the removed plug in a placeyou can easily remember.

20. Reinstall the cargo area floor.Place the flat tire face down on thecargo area floor.

21. Align the center of the flat tire withthe hole in the cargo area floor.Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

22. Secure the flat tire by screwing thewing bolt to the spare tire mountthrough the hole in the cargo areafloor.

23. Your vehicle's original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer toChanging a Tire with TPMS (seepage 228).

SPACER CONE

WING BOLT


288

Diagnosing why the engine won'tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:● You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine's startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

● You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very SlowlyWhen you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:● Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in Park or neutral.

● Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged (seeJump Starting on page 291).

● Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. SeeEmergency Towing on page 303.

If the headlights dim noticeably or goout when you try to start the engine,either the battery is discharged orthe connections are corroded. Checkthe condition of the battery andterminal connections (see page 277).You can then try jump starting thevehicle from a booster battery (seepage 291).

CONTINUED

If the Engine Won't Start

289

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

The Starter Operates NormallyIn this case, the starter motor's speedsounds normal, or even faster thannormal, when you turn the ignitionswitch to the START (III) position,but the engine does not run.● Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page 60).

● Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to Starting theEngine on page 216.

● Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

● There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses (seepage 298).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to find theproblem (see Emergency Towingon page 303).

If the Engine Won't Start

290

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correctprocedure, seriously injuringanyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

1. Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can freeze. Attemptingto jump start with a frozen battery cancause it to rupture.

2. Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (manual)or Park (automatic), and set theparking brake.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

BOOSTER BATTERY

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

291

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

3. Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (＋) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive (＋) terminal on thebooster battery.

4. Connect the second jumper cableto the negative (－) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapon your vehicle as shown. Do notconnect this jumper cable to anyother part of the engine.

5. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant start thatvehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6. Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

7. Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Jump Starting

292

The pointer of the vehicle'stemperature gauge should stay in themidrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam or spraycoming from under the hood.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

1. Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allthe accessories, and turn on thehazard lights.

2. If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

3. If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due tooverloading, the engine shouldstart to cool down almostimmediately. If it does, wait untilthe temperature gauge comesdown to the midpoint, thencontinue driving.

4. If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

CONTINUED

If the Engine Overheats

293

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

5. Look for any obvious coolantleaks, such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see EmergencyTowing on page 303).

6. If you don't find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

7. If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lower beforechecking the radiator.

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

8. Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

9. Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have the propercoolant mixture available, you canadd plain water. Remember tohave the cooling system drainedand refilled with the propermixture as soon as you can.

10. Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see EmergencyTowing on page 303).

11. If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it has gonedown, add coolant to the MAXmark. Put the cap back on tightly.

If the Engine Overheats

294

Low Oil Pressure IndicatorThis indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn offthe engine as soon as you can safely getthe vehicle stopped.

1. Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page 201). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

3. If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page 251).

4. Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see Emergency Towing on page303).

Charging System IndicatorIf the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

295

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine's emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle's performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If you keep driving with the malfunctionindicator lamp on, you can damageyour vehicle's emissions controls andengine. Those repairs may not becovered by your vehicle's warranties.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

Readiness CodesYour vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes may be erased. It can takeseveral days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to Emissions Testing for moreinformation (see page 319).

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

296

Brake System Indicator (Red)U.S. Canada

The brake system indicator (red)normally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, and as a reminder to checkthe parking brake. It will stay on ifyou do not fully release the parkingbrake.If the brake system indicator (red)comes on while driving, the brakefluid level is probably low. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page258).If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system's dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see EmergencyTowing on page 303).If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

Brake System Indicator

297

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

The vehicle's fuses are located in twofuse boxes. The under-hood fuse boxis located in the engine compartmenton the driver's side. To open it, pushthe tabs as shown.

The interior fuse box is underneaththe steering column. To remove thefuse box lid, turn the knobsclockwise and pull the lid out of itshinges.

Checking and Replacing FusesIf something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages 301 and 302, or thediagram on the fuse box lid, whichfuse or fuses control that device.Check those fuses first, but check allthe fuses before deciding that ablown fuse is the cause. Replace anyblown fuses, and check if the deviceworks.1. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

2. Remove the cover from the fusebox.

UNDER-HOOD

TAB

INTERIOR

KNOBS

Fuses

298

3. Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse boxes bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

4. Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

5. Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

FUSE

BLOWN FUSE PULLER

BLOWN

CONTINUED

Fuses

299

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement fuse with the proper ratingfor the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

6. If the replacement fuse of the samerating blows in a short time, thereis probably a serious electricalproblem in your vehicle. Leave theblown fuse in that circuit and haveyour vehicle checked by aqualified technician.

On EX and SC modelsIf the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the specific digitcode (see page 188).On vehicles with navigation systemIf the navigation system fuse isremoved, the navigation system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PIN beforeit can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

Fuses

300

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected1 － Not Used2 10 A Rear Accessory Power

Socket3 10 A Daytime Running Lights/

TPMS4 10 A ACG5 － Not Used

No. Amps. Circuits Protected6 7.5 A Power Window Relay7 20 A AMPꭧ

8 7.5 A Accessory, Radio9 10 A Rear Wiper10 7.5 A Meter11 － Not Used

No. Amps. Circuits Protected12 7.5 A Daytime Running Lights13 10 A SRS14 10 A Remote Control Mirrors15 20 A LAF Heater16 15 A Ignition Relay17 15 A Fuel Pump18 15 A Front Accessory Power

Socket19 7.5 A Turn Signal Lights20 20 A Front Wiper21 － Not Used22 20 A Passenger's Power Window23 20 A Driver's Power Window24 － Not Used25 － Not Used

ꭧ: If equipped

CONTINUED

Fuse Locations

301

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected1 30 A Condenser Fan2 15 A Small Light3 7.5 A Interior Light4 20 A Cooling Fan Motor5 15 A Hazard6 15 A FI ECU

No. Amps. Circuits Protected7 15 A Horn, Stop8 15 A DBW9 10 A Back Up10 30 A VSA Motor11 20 A Rear Defroster12 40 A Heater Motor

No. Amps. Circuits Protected13 40 A Power Window Main14 40 A Option15 15 A Left Headlight16 15 A Door Lock17 15 A Right Headlight18 30 A VSA F/S19 100 A Battery20 50 A IG1 Main

21－25 7.5 A－30 A Spare Fuses

Fuse Locations

302

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment. The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

4WD models only

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of the 4WDsystem. It should be transported on aflat-bed truck or trailer.

Emergency Towing

303

TakingCare

oftheUnexpected

304

The diagrams in this section give youthe dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle's tires andemissions control systems.

Identification Numbers ............... 306Specifications .............................. 308DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.

Vehicles) ............................. 311Uniform Tire Quality

Grading............................... 311Treadwear............................... 311Traction .................................. 311Temperature ........................... 312

Tire Labeling .............................. 313Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)－ Required FederalExplanation ......................... 314

Emissions Controls ..................... 316The Clean Air Act.................... 316Crankcase Emissions Control

System................................ 316Evaporative Emissions Control

System................................ 316Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery ............................. 316Exhaust Emissions

Controls .............................. 317

Three Way CatalyticConverter................................ 318

Emissions Testing....................... 319

Technical Information

305

TechnicalInformation

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver's side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver's doorjamb(front edge of rear door), and isstamped on the engine compartmentbulkhead. The VIN is also providedin bar code on the certification label.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Identification Numbers

306

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

Identification Numbers

307


Dimensions

Length 169.9 in (4,316 mm)ꭧ1ꭧ2

170.4 in (4,328 mm)ꭧ3

Width 71.6 in (1,819 mm)

Height 70.4 in (1,788 mm)ꭧ1,ꭧ2

69.6 in (1,768 mm)ꭧ3

Wheelbase 101.4 in (2,575 mm)

Track Front 62.1 in (1,577 mm)ꭧ1,ꭧ2

62.1 in (1,578 mm)ꭧ3

Rear 62.3 in (1,582 mm)ꭧ1,ꭧ2

62.5 in (1,587 mm)ꭧ3

Weights

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label

attached to the driver's doorjamb

(front edge of rear door).

Seating Capacities

Total 4

Front 2

Rear 2

Engine

Type Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC

i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

Bore x Stroke 3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

Displacement 144 cu-in (2,354 cm3)

Compression ratio 9.7 : 1

Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K-11

DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11

ꭧ1: LX model

ꭧ2: EX model

ꭧ3: SC model

Specifications

308

Capacities

Fuel tank Approx.

15.9 US gal (60 L)

Engine oil Changeꭧ1

Including filter 4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

Without filter 4.2 US qt (4.0 L)

Total 5.6 US qt (5.3 L)

Capacities

Engine

coolant

Automatic

Transmission

Changeꭧ2 1.35 US gal (5.1 L)

Total 1.90 US gal (7.2 L)

Manual

Transmission

Changeꭧ2 1.37 US gal (5.2 L)

Total 1.93 US gal (7.3 L)

Automatic

transmission

fluid

Change

4WD 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)

2WD 2.7 US qt (2.6 L)

Total

4WD 7.6 US qt (7.2 L)

2WD 7.4 US qt (7.0 L)

Manual

transmission

fluid

Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 L)

Total

4WD 2.4 US qt (2.3 L)

2WD 2.3 US qt (2.2 L)

Rear

differential

fluid (4WD)

Change 1.1 US qt (1.0 L)

Total 1.3 US qt (1.2 L)

Windshield washer reservoir 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

ꭧ1: Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

ꭧ2: Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine

Reserve tank capacity:

0.15 US gal (0.55 L)

Specifications

309


Air Conditioning

Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a)

Charge quantity 17.6－19.4 oz (500－550 g)

Lubricant type ND-OIL8

Lights

Headlights 12 V－ 60/55 W (H4/HB2)

Daytime running lights 12 V－ 60 W (HB3)

Front turn signal/parking lights 12 V － 27/8 W (Amber)

Front side marker lights 12 V－ 3 CP

Side turn signal lights 12 V－ 3 CP

Rear turn signal lights 12 V－ 21 W (Amber)

Rear side marker lights 12 V－ 3 CP

Brake/Taillights 12 V－ 21/5 W

Back-up lights 12 V－ 21 CP

License plate lights 12 V－ 5 W

Ceiling light 12 V－ 8 Wꭧ1

12 V－ 5 Wꭧ2, ꭧ3

Spotlights 12 V－ 8 Wꭧ2, ꭧ3

Cargo area light 12 V－ 8 W

High-mount brake light 12 V－ 21 W

Battery

Capacity 12 V－ 47 AH/20 HR

12 V－ 38 AH/5 HR

Fuses

Interior See page 301 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.

Under-hood See page 302 or the fuse boxcover.

Alignment

Toe-in Front 0.0 in (0 mm)

Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)

Camber Front －0°13’ꭧ1, ꭧ2

－0°24’ꭧ3

Rear －1°00’ꭧ1, ꭧ2

－1°06’ꭧ3

Caster Front 1°50’

Tires

Size Front/Rear P215/70R16 99Sꭧ1, ꭧ2

P225/55R18 97Hꭧ3

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)ꭧ1, ꭧ2

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)ꭧ3

Rear 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)ꭧ1, ꭧ2

32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)ꭧ3

Spare 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

ꭧ1: LX modelꭧ2: EX modelꭧ3: SC model

Specifications

310

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation (DOT)standards. The following explainsthese gradings.Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use,however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor tractionperformance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

311


TemperatureThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

312

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Those youshould be aware of are describedbelow.

Tire SizeWhenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

P215/70R16 99S

P － Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

215 － Tire width in millimeters.70 － Aspect ratio (the tire's section

height as a percentage of itswidth).

R － Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

16 － Rim diameter in inches.99 － Load index (a numerical code

associated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

S － Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN)The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example. TINis located on the sidewall of the tire.

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

DOT － This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

B97R － Manufacturer'sidentification mark.

FW6X － Tire type code.

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1) Tire Size(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)(3) Maximum Tire Pressure(4) Maximum Tire Load

(1)

(2)

(1)

(3)(4)

2202 －YearWeek

Date of manufacture.

CONTINUED

Tire Labeling

313


Glossary of Tire TerminologyCold Tire Pressure - The tire airpressure when the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hours ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6km).Load Rating - Means the maximumload that a tire is rated to carry for agiven inflation presure.Maximum Inflation Pressure - themaximum tire air pressure that thetire can hold.Maximum Load Rating - Means theload rating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure for thattire.Recommended Inflation Pressure -The cold tire inflation pressurerecommended by the manufacturer.Treadwear Indicators (TWI) - Meansthe projections within the principalgrooves designed to give a visualindication of the degrees of wear ofthe tread.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determinethe proper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation

314

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle's handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation

315


The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle's engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons.Controlling the production of NOx,CO, and HC is important to theenvironment. Under certainconditions of sunlight and climate,NOx and HC react to formphotochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The Clean Air ActThe United States Clean Air Actꭧ setsstandards for automobile emissions. Italso requires that automobilemanufacturers explain to owners howtheir emissions controls work andwhat to do to maintain them. Thissection summarizes how theemissions controls work.ꭧ In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with Environment Canada,at the time they are manufactured.

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystemYour vehicle has a positive crankcaseventilation system. This keeps gassesthat build up in the engine's crankcasefrom going into the atmosphere. Thepositive crankcase ventilation valveroutes them from the crankcase backto the intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystemAs gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.Onboard Refueling VaporRecoveryThe onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Emissions Controls

316

Exhaust Emissions ControlsThe exhaust emissions controlsinclude three systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, and threeway catalytic converter. These threesystems work together to control theengine's combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

PGM-FI SystemThe PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. Itthen controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.Ignition Timing Control SystemThis system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.Three Way Catalytic ConverterThe three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen(N2), and water vapor.

Replacement PartsThe emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for moreinformation.

Emissions Controls

317


The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine'sperformance. Follow theseguidelines to protect your vehicle'sthree way catalytic converter.● Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

● Keep the engine well maintained.● Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring,backfiring, stalling, or otherwisenot running properly.

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Three Way Catalytic Converter

318

Testing of Readiness CodesIf you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.1. Make sure the fuel tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

2. Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

3. Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F (4° and 35°C).

4. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

5. Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

6. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

CONTINUED

Emissions Testing

319


7. Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Then drive in city/suburban trafficfor at least 10 minutes. Whentraffic conditions allow, let thevehicle coast for several secondswithout using the accelerator pedalor the brake pedal.

9. Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Emissions Testing

320

Customer Service Information .... 322Warranty Coverages ................... 323Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.

Vehicles)................................. 324Authorized Manuals.................... 325

Warranty and Customer Relations

321

Warranty

andCustom

erRelations

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it with thedealership's management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership'smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.U.S. Owners:American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners:CUSTOMER RELATIONS

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

When you call or write, please giveus this information:● Vehicle identification number (seepage 306)

● Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

● Date of purchase● Odometer reading of your vehicle● Your name, address, andtelephone number

● A detailed description of theproblem

● Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

Customer Service Information

322

U.S. OwnersYour new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty －covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty － these twowarranties cover your vehicle'semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty － this warranty gives up to100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty － a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.Rust Perforation Limited Warranty －all exterior body panels are coveredfor rust-through from the inside forthe specified time period with nomileage limit.Accessory Limited Warranty －Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty － covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty － provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty － providescoverage for as long as the purchaserof the muffler owns the vehicle.Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2010 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle's originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.Canadian OwnersPlease refer to the 2010 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

323

Warranty

andCustom

erRelations

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

324

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

● Call Helm Inc. at (800)782-4356 (credit card orders only)

● Go online at www. helminc. com

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at (800) 782-4356.

PublicationForm Number

Form Description

61SCV08 2010 Honda Element Service Manual

61SCV08EL 2010 Honda ElementElectrical Troubleshooting Manual

61SCV30 2009 Honda Element Body Repair Manual

31SCV670 2010 Honda Element Owner's Manual

31SCV810 2010 Honda ElementNavigation System Owner's Manual

31SCVM50 2010 Honda Element Honda Service History

31SCVQ70 2010 Honda Element Technology Reference Guide

HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate Year and Model Desired

Service Manual:Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuit inyour vehicle.Body Repair Manual:Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

325

Warranty

andCustom

erRelations

326

A

Accessories andModifications .......................... 205

ACCESSORY (Ignition KeyPosition) ................................... 79

Accessory Power Sockets .......... 100Additives, Engine Oil ................. 252Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...... 74Advanced Airbags ........................ 27Airbag (SRS) ............................ 9, 22Air Conditioning System ............ 104Air Pressure, Tires .............. 271, 272Alcohol in Gasoline .................... 198Antifreeze ................................... 254Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)Indicator Light .................. 59, 225Operation ................................ 225

Anti-theft, Audio System ............. 188Anti-theft Steering Column

Lock ......................................... 79Audio System ............................. 109Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ... 20Automatic Speed Control ........... 193

Automatic Transmission ............ 219Capacity, Fluid ........................ 309Checking Fluid Level .............. 256Shifting ................................... 219Shift Lever PositionIndicators ............................ 219

Shift Lever Positions ............... 219Shift Lock Release ................... 221

Automatic Transmission Fluid ... 256Auxiliary Input Jack ................... 192

B

BatteryCharging SystemIndicator ........................ 58, 295

Jump Starting .......................... 291Maintenance ........................... 277Specifications .......................... 310

Before Driving ........................... 197Belts, Seat ................................ 8, 18Beverage Holders ........................ 99Booster Seats ............................... 50BrakesAnti-lock Brakes (ABS) ........... 225

Break-in, New Linings ............. 198Bulb Replacement ................... 266Fluid ....................................... 258Parking .................................... 94System Design ........................ 224System Indicator ............... 58, 297Wear Indicators ....................... 225

Braking System .......................... 224Break-in, New Vehicle ................ 198Brightness Control,Instruments .............................. 72

CONTINUED

Index

I

INDEX

Bulb ReplacementBack-up Lights ........................ 266Brake Lights ........................... 266Daytime Running Lights ......... 262Front Parking/Turn SignalLights .................................. 263

Front Side Marker Lights ........ 265Headlights .............................. 261High-mount Brake Light ......... 267Rear Bulbs .............................. 266Rear License Plate Lights ........ 267Side Turn Signal Lights ........... 264Specifications .......................... 310Taillights ................................. 266Turn Signal Lights .................. 266

Bulbs, Halogen .......................... 261Bungee Cords ............................ 211

C

Capacities Chart ......................... 309Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............ 52Cargo ......................................... 207Cargo Area Light .......................... 96Cargo Hook ................................ 212

Cargo, How to Carry .................. 207Carrying Cargo .......................... 207CAUTION, Explanation of ............ iiiCD Care ..................................... 183CD Error Messages ............ 125, 148CD Player ........................... 119, 140Ceiling Light ................................ 96Certification Label ...................... 306Chains, Tires .............................. 276Changing a Flat Tire .................. 283Changing OilHow to .................................... 252When to .................................. 243

Charging SystemIndicator ........................... 58, 295

Check Fuel Cap Message ............ 66Checklist, Before Driving ........... 215Child Safety .................................. 35Booster Seats ........................... 50Child Seats .................... 40, 41, 42Important Safety Reminders ..... 39Infants ...................................... 40Larger Children ....................... 49LATCH ..................................... 44Risks with Airbags ................... 36Small Children ......................... 41

Tethers .................................... 48Warning Labels ........................ 37Where Should a Child Sit? ........ 36

Child Seats ............................. 35, 42LATCH Anchorage Points ........ 44Tether Anchorage Points ......... 48

Cleaning the Seat Belts .............. 268Clock .......................................... 189Clutch Fluid ............................... 258Code, Audio System ................... 188CO in the Exhaust ................ 52, 316Cold Weather, Starting in ........... 216Compact Spare Tire .................... 282Controls, Instruments and ............ 55CoolantAdding .................................... 254Checking ................................ 201Proper Solution ....................... 254Temperature Gauge ................. 67

Cooler Box ................................... 98Courtesy Light ............................. 96Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem ................................... 316

Cruise Control Indicator ............... 60Cruise Control Operation ........... 193Cruise Main Indicator .................. 60

Index

II

Cup Holders ................................. 99Customer Service ....................... 322

D

DANGER, Explanation of ............. iiiDashboard ............................... 3, 56Daytime Running Lights .............. 72Daytime Running Lights

Indicator ................................... 60Dead Battery .............................. 291Defects, Reporting Safety (U.S.

only) ....................................... 324Defogger, Rear Window ............... 74Dimensions ................................ 308Dimming the Headlights .............. 71DipstickAutomatic Transmission ......... 256Engine Oil ............................... 201

Directional Signals ................. 60, 71Disc Brake Wear Indicators ....... 225Disc Care ................................... 183Disc Changer Error

Messages ............................... 126

Disc Player ErrorMessages ........................ 125, 148

Disposal of Used Oil ................... 253DoorsIndicator ................................... 11Locking and Unlocking ............ 80Power Door Locks ................... 80

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.Vehicles) ................................ 311

Downshifting, ManualTransmission .......................... 217

Driver and Passenger Safety .......... 5Driving ....................................... 213Economy ................................. 202

Driving Guidelines ..................... 214Dust and Pollen Filter ................ 269

E

Economy, Fuel ........................... 202Emergencies on the Road .......... 281Battery, Jump Starting ............. 291Brake System Indicator ..... 58, 297Changing a Flat Tire ............... 283

Charging SystemIndicator ........................ 58, 295

Checking the Fuses ................ 298Driving with a Flat Tire ........... 282Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 73Jump Starting .......................... 291Low Oil Pressure

Indicator ........................ 58, 295Malfunction Indicator

Lamp ............................. 58, 296Overheated Engine ................. 293Towing .................................... 303

Emergency Brake ........................ 94Emergency Flashers .................... 73Emergency Towing .................... 303Emissions Controls .................... 316Emissions Testing ...................... 319

CONTINUED

Index

III

INDEX

EngineAdding Engine Coolant ........... 254Coolant Temperature Gauge .... 67If it Won't Start ........................ 289Malfunction IndicatorLamp ............................. 58, 296

Oil Life Indicator ..................... 243Oil Pressure Indicator ....... 58, 295Oil, What Kind to Use ............. 251Overheating ............................ 293Specifications .......................... 308Speed Limiter .................. 218, 221Starting ................................... 216

Engine Coolant .......................... 254Engine Number ......................... 307Ethanol in Gasoline .................... 198Evaporative Emissions

Controls .................................. 316Exhaust Fumes ............................ 52Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

Belts by .................................... 16

F

Fan, Interior ............................... 105

Features ..................................... 103FiltersDust and Pollen ....................... 269Oil ........................................... 252

Flashers, Hazard Warning ........... 73Flat Tire, Changing a ................. 283Floor Mats ................................. 268FluidsAutomatic Transmission ......... 256Brake ...................................... 258Clutch ..................................... 258Location .................................. 250Manual Transmission .............. 257Power Steering ........................ 260Rear Differential ...................... 258Windshield Washer ................. 255

FM/AM Radio Reception ........... 186Folding the Rear Seats ................. 88Four-way Flashers ........................ 73Front Airbags ........................... 9, 25Front SeatAdjusting .................................. 83

Fuel ............................................ 198Check Fuel Cap Message ........ 66Economy ................................. 202Fill Door and Cap .................... 199

Gauge ...................................... 66Low Fuel Indicator ................... 61Octane Requirement ............... 198Reserve Indicator ..................... 61Tank, Filling the ...................... 199

Fuel Economy ............................ 202Fuses, Checking the .................. 298

G

Gas Mileage, Improving ............. 203Gasoline ..................................... 198Gauge ...................................... 66Low Fuel Indicator ................... 61Octane Requirement ............... 198Tank, Refueling ....................... 199

Gas Station Procedures .............. 199GaugesEngine Coolant Temperature ... 67Fuel .......................................... 66Odometer ................................. 65Outside Temperature

Indicator ............................... 68Speedometer ............................ 64Tachometer .............................. 64

Index

IV

Trip meter ................................ 66Gearshift Lever PositionsAutomaticTransmission ....................... 219

Manual Transmission .............. 217Glove Box .................................. 100Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) ................................. 232Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) .......................... 209, 232

H

Halogen Headlight Bulbs ........... 261Hatch ........................................... 81Hazard Warning Flashers ............ 73HeadlightsAiming .................................... 261Daytime Running Lights .......... 72High Beam Indicator ................ 61High Beams, Turning on .......... 71Lights On Indicator .................. 61Low Beams, Turning on ........... 71Reminder Chime ...................... 71Replacing Halogen Bulbs ........ 261

Turning on ............................... 71Head Restraints ............................ 85Heating and Cooling .................. 104High Altitude, Starting at ............ 216Hood, Opening and Closingthe .......................................... 200

Horn ........................................ 4, 69Hydraulic Clutch ........................ 258

I

Identification Number,Vehicle ................................... 306

IgnitionKeys ......................................... 75Switch ...................................... 79

Immobilizer System ..................... 76Important Safety Precautions ......... 6Indicators, Instrument Panel ........ 57ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ....... 59, 226Brake (Parking and BrakeSystem) ......................... 58, 297

Charging System .............. 58, 295Cruise Control .......................... 60Cruise Main ............................. 60

Door and Tailgate Open ........... 61DRL (Daytime Running

Lights) .................................. 60High Beam ............................... 61Key (Immobilizer System) ....... 60Lights On ................................. 61Low Fuel .................................. 61Low Oil Pressure .............. 58, 295Low Tire Pressure ............. 62, 227Maintenance Minder ......... 59, 243Malfunction Indicator

Lamp ............................. 58, 296Passenger Airbag Off ............... 32Seat Belt Reminder ............. 18, 58Side Airbag Off .................... 32, 59SRS ..................................... 31, 59TPMS ................................ 63, 228Turn Signal and Hazard

Warning ............................... 60VSA OFF .................................. 62VSA System ............................. 62Washer Level ........................... 61

Individual Map Lights .................. 95Infant Restraint ............................ 40

CONTINUED

Index

V

INDEX

Infant Seats .................................. 40Tether Anchorage Point ........... 48

Inflation, Proper Tire .................. 271Recommended Pressures ....... 272

Inside Mirror ............................... 93Inspection, Tire .......................... 273Installing a Child Seat .................. 43Instrument Panel .......................... 57Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 72Instruments and Controls ............. 55Interior Lights .............................. 95Introduction ................................... iiPod® .......................................... 162iPod® Error Messages ................ 172

J

Jacking up the Vehicle ............... 283Jack, Tire ................................... 283Jump Starting ............................. 291

K

Keys ............................................. 75

L

Label, Certification ..................... 306Lane Change, Signaling ............... 71Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19LATCH Anchorage System .......... 44Light Control Switch .................... 95LightsBulb Replacement ................... 261Indicator ................................... 57Interior ..................................... 95Parking .................................... 71Turn Signal .............................. 71

Load Limit .................................. 208LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ...... 79LocksAnti-theft Steering Column ....... 79Fuel Fill Door .......................... 199Glove Box ............................... 100Hatch ....................................... 81Lockout Prevention .................. 81Power Door .............................. 80Tailgate .................................... 82

Low Coolant Level ...................... 201Lower Anchors ............................. 44

Low Fuel Indicator ....................... 61Low Oil PressureIndicator ........................... 58, 295

Lubricant Specifications Chart ... 309Luggage, Storing (cargo) ........... 207

M

Maintenance .............................. 241Main Items and Sub Items ...... 246Minder .................................... 243Minder Indicator ...................... 59Owner's Maintenance

Checks ................................ 248Safety ...................................... 242Schedule ................................. 249

Malfunction IndicatorLamp ................................ 58, 296

Manual Transmission ................. 217Checking Fluid Level .............. 257Shifting ................................... 217

Manual Transmission Fluid ....... 257Meters, Gauges ............................ 64Methanol in Gasoline ................. 198Mirrors, Adjusting ........................ 93

Index

VI

Modifications ............................. 206Modifying Your Vehicle ............. 206

N

Neutral Gear Position ................. 220New Vehicle Break-in ................. 198Normal Shift Speeds .................. 218NOTICE, Explanation of ................ iNumbers, Identification ............. 306

O

Octane Requirement,Gasoline ................................. 198

Odometer ..................................... 65Off-Highway Driving

Guidelines .............................. 238Off-Road Precautions .................. 238OilChange, How to ...................... 252Change, When to .................... 243Checking Engine .................... 201Life, Engine ............................. 243Pressure Indicator ............. 58, 295

Selecting Proper ViscosityChart ................................... 251

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery ................................ 316

ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 79Outside Mirrors ........................... 93Outside Temperature Indicator .... 68Overhead Console ...................... 101Overheating, Engine .................. 293Owner's Maintenance Checks .... 248Oxygenated Fuels ...................... 198

P

Panel Brightness Control ............. 72Park Gear Position ..................... 219Parking ...................................... 223Parking Brake .............................. 94Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator ........................... 58, 297

Parking Over Things thatBurn ................................ 223, 318

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .... 32PGM-FI System .......................... 317Playing a Disc ..................... 119, 140

Playing an iPod® ......................... 162Playing a PC card ....................... 149Playing a USB Flash MemoryDevice .................................... 173

Playing the FM/AMRadio ............................... 110, 127

Playing the XM® Radio ........ 113, 132Pollen Filter ............................... 269Power Door Locks ....................... 80Power Socket Locations ............. 100Power Steering Fluid ................. 260Power Windows ........................... 92Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts ........ 16Preparing to Drive ...................... 215Proper Seat Belt Usage ................ 14Protecting Adults and Teens ........ 11Additional Safety Precautions ... 16Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16

CONTINUED

Index

VII

INDEX

Protecting Children ...................... 35General Guidelines .................. 35Protecting Infants ..................... 40Protecting Larger Children ...... 49Protecting Small Children ........ 41Using Child Seats withTethers ................................. 48

Using LATCH .......................... 44

R

Radiator Overheating ................. 293Radio/CD Sound System ........... 109Radio Theft Protection ............... 188Readiness Codes ........................ 319Rear Differential Fluid ................ 258Rear Lights, Bulb

Replacement ........................... 266Rear Seat, Folding ........................ 88Rearview Camera and

Monitor .................................. 196Rearview Mirror ........................... 93Rear Window Defogger ................ 74Rear Window Wiper and

Washer ..................................... 70

Reclining the Front Seats ............. 87Recommended Shift Speeds ....... 218Refueling .................................... 199Reminder Indicators ..................... 58Remote Audio Controls .............. 191Remote Transmitter ..................... 77Replacement InformationDust and Pollen Filter ............. 269Engine Oil and Filter ............... 252Fuses ...................................... 298Light Bulbs ............................. 261Schedule ................................. 249Spark Plugs ............................. 308Tires ....................................... 274Wiper Blades .......................... 269

Replacing Seat Belts After aCrash ........................................ 20

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Vehicles) ................................ 324

Reserve Tank, EngineCoolant ............................ 201, 254

Restraint, Child ............................ 35Reverse Gear Position ................ 220Reverse Lockout ........................ 217Rotation, Tire ............................. 274

S

Safety Belts .............................. 8, 18Safety Defects, Reporting (U.S.only) ....................................... 324

Safety Features .............................. 7Airbags ................................. 9, 22Head Restraints ........................ 13Seat Belts ........................ 8, 14, 18Seats & Seat-Backs .............. 11, 12

Safety Labels, Location of ............. 53Safety Messages .......................... iiiSeat Adjustments ......................... 83Seat Belts ................................. 8, 18Additional Information ............. 18Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16Automatic Seat Belt

Tensioners ........................... 20Cleaning .................................. 268Lap/Shoulder Belt .............. 14, 19Maintenance ............................ 20Reminder Indicator and

Beeper ............................. 18, 58System Components ................ 18Use During Pregnancy ............. 16

Index

VIII

Wearing a Lap/ShoulderBelt .................................. 14, 19

Seats ............................................ 83Head Restraints ........................ 85

Seats, Adjusting the ..................... 83SensorsDriver's Seat Position Sensor ... 27Front Passenger's WeightSensors ................................ 27

Impact Sensors ................... 22, 23Serial Number ............................ 306Service Intervals ......................... 243Service Manual (U.S. only) ........ 325Service Station Procedures ........ 199Setting the Clock ........................ 189Shifting the Automatic

Transmission .......................... 219Shift Lever Position Indicators ... 219Shift Lock Release ...................... 221Side Airbags ................................. 28How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works ................... 32

How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28Side Curtain Airbags .................... 30How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork .................................... 30

Side Marker Lights, BulbReplacement in ....................... 265

Signaling Turns ............................ 60Snow Tires ................................. 275Sound System ............................ 109Spare Tire .................................. 282Inflating ........................... 271, 282Specifications .......................... 310

Spark Plugs ................................ 308Specifications ............................. 308Speed Control ............................ 193Speed Limiter ...................... 218, 221Speedometer ................................ 64SRS, Additional Information ......... 22Additional Safety Precautions ... 34Airbag Service .......................... 33Airbag System Components ..... 22How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works ................... 32

How the SRS Indicator Works .. 31How Your Front AirbagsWork .................................... 25

How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork .................................... 30

SRS Indicator ......................... 31, 59

START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 79Starting the Engine .................... 216In Cold Weather at High

Altitude ................................ 216With a Dead Battery ................ 291

State Emissions Testing ............. 319Steam Coming from Engine ....... 293Steering WheelAdjustment ............................... 74Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 79Buttons ........................... 191, 193

Stereo Sound System ................. 109Storing Your Vehicle .................. 278Sun Visor ................................... 100Supplemental Restraint

System .............................. 9, 22Servicing .................................. 33SRS Indicator ...................... 31, 59System Components ................ 22

Synthetic Oil .............................. 252

T

Tachometer .................................. 64

CONTINUED

Index

IX

INDEX

Tailgate ........................................ 82Open Indicator ......................... 61Opening the ............................. 82

Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ..... 266Taking Care of the

Unexpected ............................ 281Technical DescriptionsDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.Vehicles) ............................. 311

Emissions Control Systems ..... 316Three Way CatalyticConverter ............................ 318

Tire Labeling ........................... 313Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) － Required FederalExplanation ...................... 314

Temperature Gauge ..................... 67Tensioners, Seat Belts .................. 20Tether Anchorage Points ............. 48Theft Protection, Radio .............. 188Three Way Catalytic

Converter ............................... 318Tilt the Steering Wheel ................ 74Time, Setting the ........................ 189Tire Chains ................................ 276Tire, How to Change a Flat ........ 283

Tire Information ......................... 313Tire Labeling .............................. 313Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) ........................... 227, 314

Tires .......................................... 271Air Pressure ............................ 272Chains ..................................... 276Checking Wear ....................... 273Compact Spare ........................ 282DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.Vehicles) ............................. 311

Inflation ................................... 271Inspection ............................... 273Labeling .................................. 313Low Tire PressureIndicator ........................ 62, 227

Maintenance ........................... 274Pressure Monitoring System ... 227Replacing ................................ 274Rotating .................................. 274Snow ....................................... 275Specifications .......................... 310

Tools, Tire Changing ................. 283TowingA Trailer .................................. 232Emergency Wrecker ............... 303

TPMS (Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem) .............................. 227

Indicator ............................ 63, 228Required Federal

Explanation ......................... 314TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

Automatic ............................ 256Checking Fluid Level,

Manual ................................ 257Fluid Selection ................ 256, 257Identification Number ............. 306Shifting the Automatic ............. 219Shifting the Manual ................. 217

Treadwear .................................. 311Trip Meter ................................... 66Turn Signals ................................. 60Turn Signals and Headlights ........ 71

U

Unexpected, Taking Care ofthe .......................................... 281

Uniform Tire Quality Grading(U.S. only) .............................. 311

Index

X

Unleaded Gasoline ..................... 198USB Flash Memory Device Error

Messages ............................... 182Used Oil, How to Dispose of ...... 253

V

Vanity Mirror ............................. 101Vehicle Capacity Load ................ 208Vehicle Dimensions ................... 308Vehicle Identification Number ... 306Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),

aka Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), System

VSA OFF Indicator .................. 230Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

System ................................ 230VSA OFF Indicator ................... 62VSA OFF Switch ..................... 231VSA System Indicator .............. 62

Vehicle Storage .......................... 278Ventilation .................................. 106VIN ............................................ 306Viscosity, Oil .............................. 251

W

WARNING, Explanation of ........... iiiWarning Labels, Location of ......... 53Warranty Coverages (U.S.only) ....................................... 323

Washer, WindshieldChecking the Fluid Level ........ 255Fluid Level Indicator (Canadaonly) ..................................... 61

Operation ................................. 70Wheels ....................................... 271Adjusting the Steering .............. 74Alignment and Balance ........... 274Compact Spare ........................ 282Wrench, Nut ........................... 283

WindowsOperating the Power ................ 92Rear, Defogger ......................... 74

WindshieldCleaning ................................... 70Defroster ................................. 107Washers ............................ 70, 255

Wipers, WindshieldChanging Blades ..................... 269

Operation ................................. 70Worn Tires ................................. 273Wrecker, Emergency Towing .... 303

X

XM® Radio .......................... 113, 132

Index

XI

INDEX

Gasoline:Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

Fuel Tank Capacity:15.9 US gal (60 L)

Recommended Engine Oil:API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page 251).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

Automatic Transmission Fluid:Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid)(see page 256).

Manual Transmission Fluid:Honda Manual Transmission Fluidpreferred, or an SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page 257).

Capacity (including differential):2.0 US qt (1.9 L)

4WD models onlyRear Differential Fluid:Honda Dual Pump Fluid II. Do notuse ATF.

Capacity:1.1 US qt (1.0 L)

Power Steering Fluid:Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page 260).

Brake Fluid:Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page 258).

Tire Pressure (measured cold):All models except SCFront:33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear:35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)

SC modelFront/Rear:32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Spare Tire Pressure:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Service Information Summary

Documents

2010 Element Owner's Manual